Manual Del Propietario Jeep Grand Cherokee 2009

2009 GRAND CHEROKEE
GRAND CHEROKEE 2009 owner’s manual

Chrysler LLC
81-326-0954 Second Edition Printed in U.S.A.
150920 GrCherokee.indd 1 9/9/08 8:33:17 AM

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the features and equipment that are either standard or op-
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefor. tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL description of features and equipment that are no longer
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
accidents. disregard any features and equipment described in this
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood manual that are not on this vehicle.
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
WARNING!
ously manufactured.
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2008 Chrysler LLC
SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 10
INTRODUCTION 1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
䡵 Rollover Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number .............. 8
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect

This is a specialized utility vehicle designed for both the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
on-road and off-road use. It can go places and perform Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws
tasks for which conventional two-wheel drive enclosed wherever you drive.
vehicles were not intended. It handles and maneuvers
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
differently from many passenger cars both on-road and
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an
off-road, so take time to become familiar with your
accident. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
vehicle.
Section 5 of this manual.
The two-wheel drive utility vehicle was designed for
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel
the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
drive vehicle.
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s various customer-oriented documents. You are urged to
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmis- tions and recommendations in this manual will help
sion, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills
will improve with experience. When driving off-road or
INTRODUCTION 5
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored in Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle 1
vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
all safety warnings. in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained
technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and is inter-
ested in your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over when some other vehicles may Rollover Warning Label
not.
6 INTRODUCTION
Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
government notes that the universal use of existing seat contains the information you desire.
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing Consult the following table for a description of the
a seat belt. Always buckle up. symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 7
1
8 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
label located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile VIN Location
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN label.
your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of
your vehicle identification number and optional equip-
ment.
INTRODUCTION 9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 ▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Integrated Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ▫ To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 䡵 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 䡵 Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 ▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 ▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 ▫ To Release The Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . 24
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Express Down Window Feature — If ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
䡵 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 25
▫ Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 27
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions . . . . 38
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 41
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
▫ Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped . . . . 42
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 (BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 45 ▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The 2
Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 68
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
with integrated ignition key and a Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) with integral ignition switch. You can insert
the double-sided key into the ignition switch with either
side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three of
which are detented and one spring-loaded. The detented
positions are LOCK, ACC, and ON. The START position Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
1 — LOCK
released from the START position, the switch automati- 2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
cally returns to the detented ON position. 3 — ON
4 — START
Integrated Ignition Key

The integrated ignition key operates the ignition switch.
It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter and a valet key, which stores in the rear of the RKE 2
transmitter.
The valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should the
battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead. The
valet key is also for locking the glove box. You can keep
the valet key with you when valet parking.
To remove the valet key from the RKE transmitter, slide
the mechanical latch at the top of the RKE transmitter
sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out Three-Button FOBIK (FOB with Integrated Key)
with your other hand. NOTE: You can insert the double-sided valet key into
the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Key Removal
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition key to the
LOCK position, and remove the key.
NOTE: Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” under

• If you try to remove the key before you place the shift “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
lever in PARK, it may become trapped temporarily in Section 4 of this manual.
the ignition switch. If this occurs, rotate the key to the
right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a WARNING!
malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
ignition switch to warn you that this safety feature is
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped, but
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in the
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle ignition. A child could operate power windows,
Information Center (EVIC), the power window other controls, or move the vehicle.
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes
CAUTION!
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi-
tion. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
The time for this feature is programmable. For details, remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
refer to “Key Off Power Delay,” under “Personal when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
If you open the driver’s door with the integrated ignition seconds if an invalid RKE transmitter is used to start the
key in the ignition, a chime will sound to remind you to engine.
remove the key.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON position, the
2
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
when the integrated ignition key is placed in the LOCK bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
or ACC position. indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
SENTRY KEY姞 it indicates that someone used an invalid RKE transmitter
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system prevents unautho- to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The the engine being shut off after two seconds.
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
or unlocked. vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
The system uses the factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
(RKE) transmitter with integrated key and Wireless Igni- possible.
tion Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera-
tion. Therefore, only RKE transmitters that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
NOTE: the vehicle. Once an RKE transmitter is programmed to a

• The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatible vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
with aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these
systems may result in vehicle starting problems and CAUTION!
loss of security protection.
Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all
• Exxon/Mobil Speedpass™, additional RKE transmit- doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
ters, or any other transponder-equipped components
on the same key chain will not cause a fault unless the At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
additional part is physically held against the RKE with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
transmitter being used to start the vehicle. Cell Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
phones, pagers, or other RF electronics will not cause required for authorized dealer replacement of RKE trans-
interference with this system. mitters. Duplication of RKE transmitters may be per-
formed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer
All of the RKE transmitters provided with your new
Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
programming a blank transmitter to the vehicle electron-
Replacement Keys ics. A blank transmitter is one that has never been
programmed.
NOTE: Only RKE transmitters that are programmed to
the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer 3. Insert a blank integrated key into the ignition switch
system serviced, bring all vehicle RKE transmitters with and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
you to the authorized dealer. 60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound
Customer Key Programming
and the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing, turn on 2
again for three seconds, and then turn off.
If you have two valid RKE transmitters with integrated
keys, you can program new transmitters to the system by The new integrated key is programmed. The RKE trans-
performing the following procedure: mitter will also be programmed during this procedure.
1. Insert the first valid integrated key into the ignition Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position for do not have a programmed RKE transmitter with inte-
at least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. grated key, contact your authorized dealer for details.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
remove the first key.
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-
2. Insert the second valid integrated key and turn the tem’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from
ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds. starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be
After 10 seconds, a chime will sound and the Vehicle reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an
Security Light will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch authorized dealer at the time of service to be
to the LOCK position and remove the second key. reprogrammed.
General Information NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ-
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15 ent. Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case
subject to the following conditions: one should go off in the future, you will need to know
which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Rearming The System
• This device must accept any interference that may be
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
received, including interference that may cause undes-
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
ired operation.
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors, rearm itself.
liftgate, liftgate flipper glass, and ignition for unautho- To Set the Alarm
rized operation. When the alarm is activated, the Vehicle The alarm will set when you use the Remote Keyless
Security Alarm provides both audible and visible signals. Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock the doors and liftgate, or
The horn, headlights, and tail lights will sound/flash when you use the power door lock switch while the door
repeatedly for three minutes. If disturbance is still is open. After all the doors are locked and closed, the
present (driver’s door, passenger door, other doors, igni- Vehicle Security Light (located in the instrument cluster)
tion) after three minutes, the headlights and tail lights will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the
will flash for an additional 15 minutes.
Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During this 16 second the alarm will sound. If this occurs, press the UNLOCK
arming period, opening any door or the liftgate will button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle
cancel the arming. If the Vehicle Security Alarm success- Security Alarm. You may also accidentally disarm the
fully arms, the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a Vehicle Security Alarm by unlocking the driver’s door 2
slower rate to indicate the alarm is set. with the key and then locking it. The door will be locked
but the Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm.
To Disarm the System
To disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm, you will need to ILLUMINATED ENTRY
press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or The interior lights come on when you open any door or
turn the ignition key to the ON position. If something has use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to un-
triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence, the lock any door. They will remain on for about 30 seconds
horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors. after all doors are closed then fade to off.
Check the vehicle for tampering.
The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your after you close all the doors.
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
transmitter, once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed liftgate, or activate the panic alarm, from distances up to
(after 16 seconds), when you pull the door handle to exit, approximately 30 ft (9 m) using a handheld Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter

does not need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
NOTE: Inserting the RKE transmitter into the ignition
switch disables all buttons on that RKE transmitter;
however, the buttons on the remaining RKE transmitters
will continue to work. Driving the vehicle over 5 mph
disables all RKE transmitter buttons, for all RKE trans-
mitters, until the ignition is turned back to OFF/LOCK.
Three-Button RKE Transmitter

To Unlock the Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to
unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry
system will also turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Press Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Flash Lamps with
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either Lock” under “Personal Settings (Customer-
the driver’s door, or all doors, on the first press of the Programmable Features)” in the ⬙Electronic Vehicle 2
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the Information Center (EVIC),” in Section 4 of this
current setting, proceed as follows: manual.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Remote Key This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
Unlock” under “Personal Settings (Customer- when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
Programmable Features)” in the “Electronic Vehicle The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
Information Center (EVIC),” in Section 4 of this equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
manual. (EVIC). For details, refer to “Headlamp Off Delay” under
“Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)”
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
in the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),” in
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
ter. This feature can be turned on or off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
To Lock the Doors To Release the Liftgate Flipper Glass

Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- Press the FLIPPER GLASS/TRUNK RELEASE button
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and two times (the second press within 5 seconds of the first
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. press) to open liftgate flipper glass.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
WARNING!
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poi-
turned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed as sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
follows: passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the flipper glass closed when you are operating the
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
vehicle.
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Sound Horn with
Lock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-
Express Down Window Feature — If Equipped
Programmable Features)” in the “Electronic Vehicle
This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door
Information Center (EVIC),” in Section 4 of this
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
manual.
release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and
then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button
until the windows lower to the level desired or until they
lower completely.
Using the Panic Alarm Programming Additional Transmitters

To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold Refer to Sentry Key威 “Customer Key Programming.”
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
contact your authorized dealer for details.
2
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on. Transmitter Battery Service
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
battery.
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time, or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph NOTE:
(24 km/h) or greater. • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition • Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic housing or the printed circuit board.
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
1. Battery access is through a door located on the rear of 2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
the fob. Insert a small, flat blade screwdriver into the slot new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
and gently pry open the access door. battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. Reposition the access door panel over the battery
opening and snap into place.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
Battery Replacement operation.
1— Battery Access Door
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter fails to • Doors closed

operate from a normal distance, check for these two
• Hood closed
conditions.
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
• Liftgate closed 2
life of the battery is a minimum of three years. • Hazard switch off
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED • Battery at an acceptable charge level, and
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve- • RKE PANIC button not pressed.
niently from outside the vehicle while still To Enter Remote Start Mode
maintaining security. The system has a range of Press and release the REMOTE START button
328 ft (100 m). on the RKE transmitter twice, within five sec-
How to Use Remote Start onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
All of the following conditions must be met before the will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will remote start: engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
• Shift lever in PARK
NOTE: NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system

• If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
then shut down 10 seconds later. button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode. To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the
• For security, power window and power sunroof op-
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
in the Remote Start mode.
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch
15 minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, to the ON position.
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position in
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
order to drive the vehicle.
cycle.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving the
Information Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/
Vehicle
Turn To Run” will flash in the EVIC until you insert
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
the key. Once inserted, the message “Turn To Run”
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
will flash in the EVIC until you turn the key to run.
DOOR LOCKS Power Door Locks

The power door lock switch is located on each front door
Manual Door Locks
panel. Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door
2
is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key
is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition, and lock your vehicle. Do not
leave unattended children in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of Power Door Lock Switch
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal in- If the plunger is down when the door is closed, the door
juries and death. will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
If you press the door lock switch while the keys are in the This feature is selectable and can be turned on or off.
ignition switch, and the driver’s door is open, the doors Refer to “Auto Door Locks” under “Customer-
will not lock. Programmable Features” in the “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC),” in Section 4 of this manual or see
The rear doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicle
your authorized dealer.
until you pull up the lock plungers.
Child Protection Door Lock
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
The rear doors of your vehicle are equipped with Child
If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the
Protection Door Locks. If you push up on the lever on the
doors when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is
open edge of the door it cannot be opened from the inside
stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL. Refer to “Auto
of the vehicle. Push the lever down to disengage the
Unlock on Exit” under the “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
Child Protection Door Locks.
tion Center (EVIC),” in section 4 of this manual or see
your authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Automatic Door Locks
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
If this feature is selected, your door locks will lock
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
automatically when the vehicle speed is above 15 mph
from the outside when the Child Protection Door
(24 km/h) and all doors are closed. It will reset whenever
Locks are engaged.
a door is opened.
passenger/rear passenger door windows. The window

controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON or ACCESSORY position.
2
Child Protection Door Lock

WINDOWS
Power Windows
Power Window Switches
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front The power window switches remain active for up to
passenger door/rear doors which operates the front 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
Auto Down To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Both the driver and front passenger window switch has Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
an “Auto Down” feature. Press the window switch past
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent, release, and the window will go down
the first detent and release when you want the window to
automatically. To cancel the “Auto Down” movement,
stop.
operate the switch in either the up or down direction and
release the switch. NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
Auto Up it will reverse direction and then stop. Remove
To open the window part way, press to the first detent
the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the
and release it when you want the window to stop.
window. Any impact due to rough road conditions may
The power window switches remain active for 10 min- trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during
utes after the ignition has been turned OFF. Opening Auto Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
either front door will cancel this feature. first detent and hold it to close the window manually.
Auto Up Feature with Anti-Pinch Protection —
WARNING!
Driver’s and Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
the window will go up automatically. is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Resetting the Auto Up Feature

Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
Pull the window switch up and close the window com-
2
pletely, then pull and hold the switch for one second.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window controls on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window lockout button. To enable the window controls,
press the window lockout button again.
Window Lockout Switch
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-

rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize
the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
To open the liftgate, pull up (squeeze) on the handle and
lift. Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the
plunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the
liftgate.
Liftgate Release
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Liftgate Flipper Glass

WARNING!
The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the
liftgate is unlocked. To open the flipper glass, push up on To avoid injury, stand back when opening. Glass may
the window switch located on the liftgate. automatically rise. 2
Once the liftgate flipper glass has been opened, connec-
tion to the rear window wiper is interrupted, preventing
activation of the rear wiper blade while the flipper glass
is open.
NOTE: If a malfunction to the liftgate latch should
occur, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to
open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can
be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the
liftgate trim panel.
Liftgate Glass Release

NOTE: The front airbags have a multistage inflator

WARNING!
design. This allows the airbags to have different rates of
Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poi- inflation that are based on collision severity.
sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
Please pay close attention to the information in this
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
the flipper glass closed when you are operating the
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
vehicle.
possible.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS WARNING!

Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front injuries, including fatalities, if you are not prop-
airbags for both the driver and right front passenger, and erly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
window bags for the driver and passengers seated next to vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
a window. If you will be carrying children too small for out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
adult-size belts, your seat belts also can be used to hold in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
infant and child restraint systems. (Continued)
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move

WARNING! (Continued)
freely with you under normal conditions. But in a colli-
• Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, sion, the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out. 2
poor driver and cause a collision which includes
you. This can happen far away from home or on WARNING!
your own street.
• Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a belts are designed to go around the large bones of
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when your body. These are the strongest parts of your
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
times to reduce or prevent injuries. of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
Lap/Shoulder Belts sengers safe, too.
All seating positions in your vehicle have combination (Continued)
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is de-
signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat. Latch Plate
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
go around your lap.
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could 2
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
Latch Plate to Buckle (Continued)

tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger- collision.
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck WARNING!
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the
your strongest bones will take the force in a strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your ab-
collision. domen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect as low as possible and keep it snug.
you from injury during a collision. You are more • A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
are meant to be used together. vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer and have
it fixed.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up a 5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system 2
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

Removing Slack from Belt In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
6. To release the belt, push the red button marked PRESS adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its from your neck. Press the release button to release the
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
the webbing to allow it to retract fully. that serves you best.
Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped

In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Use Automatic Locking mode anytime a child safety seat
is installed in the rear center seating position. Children
12 years old and younger should be properly restrained
in the rear seat whenever possible.
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average, the entire belt is fully extended.
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
it is locked in position.
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode

WARNING!
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic • The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
Locking mode and activate the Vehicle Sensitive (Emer- if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re- 2
gency) Locking mode. tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt func-
tion is not working properly when checked ac-
Energy Management Feature
cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help • Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
collision.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This with a pretensioning device that is designed to remove
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a
the occupant’s chest. collision. This device improves the performance of the
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. BeltAlert威 will be
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt must still be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more
worn snugly and positioned properly. than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than
5 mph (8 km/h).
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Control (ORC). Like the front airbags, the preten- BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
sioners are a single use item. After a collision that is dealer or by following these steps:
severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners,
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
they must be replaced.
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System or START position. Chrysler LLC does not recommend
(BeltAlert姞) deactivating BeltAlert威.
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, and
60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Seat Belt
Use Reminder System (BeltAlert威) will alert the driver to 2. Turn the ignition key to the ACC/ON position (engine
buckle the seat belt. The driver should also instruct all does not need to be running), and wait for the Seat Belt
other occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the Reminder Light to turn off.
warning is triggered, BeltAlert威 will continue to chime
and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
buckled. abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take 2
the force if there is a collision.
4. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. A single
chime will sound to signify that you have successfully Seat Belt Extender
completed the programming. If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
while the driver’s seat belt remains unfastened. long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental

Restraint Systems (SRS)
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint 1 — Driver Airbag
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the 2 — Passenger Airbag
3 — Knee Bolster
steering wheel. The front passenger airbag is mounted in
the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
words SRS/AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers. regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This

may allow the airbags to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
This vehicle is equipped with window bags to protect the
2
driver, and front and rear passengers sitting next to a
window. They are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS/AIRBAG.
Window Airbag Location

NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag • Do not have any accessory items installed which
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
damage the airbags and you could be injured your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
because the airbags are no longer functional. permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for instal-
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are lation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
designed to open only when the airbags are inflat- of the vehicle for any reason.
ing. • Do not cover or place items on the airbag covers.
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high These items may cause serious injury during
enough to block the location of the window bag. inflation.
The area where the window bag is located should
remain free from any obstructions. NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat
hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
(Continued) proper performance of the window bags.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
allows the airbags to have different rates of inflation that
are based on collision severity. Along with the seat belts,
front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bol-

WARNING!
sters to provide improved protection for the driver and
front passenger. Window bags also work with seat belts Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER
to improve occupant protection. ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger 2
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
injury or death to infants in that position.
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions.
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
The window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat, in a
triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. In certain child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat. Older
types of collisions, both the front and side airbags may be children who do not use child restraints or belt-
triggered. But even in collisions where the airbags work, positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
for the airbags to protect you properly. shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
risk of harm from a deploying airbag. passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
1. Children 12 years and under should always ride
restraint. Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section.
buckled up in a rear seat.
You should read the instructions provided with your

WARNING!
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
2. All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
properly.
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to Always wear your seat belts even though you have
inflate. airbags.
4. Do not lean against the door or window, airbags will • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
inflate forcefully into the space between you and the panel during airbag deployment could cause seri-
door. ous injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back,
comfortably extending your arms to reach the
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be steering wheel or instrument panel.
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the • Side curtain airbags need room to inflate. Do not
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under “If lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the
You Need Assistance” in Section 9 of this manual. center of the seat.
Airbag System Components • Front Acceleration Sensors

The airbag system consists of the following:
• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Occupant Restraint Control (ORC)
How the Airbag System Works 2
• Airbag Warning Light
• The Occupant Restraint Control (ORC) determines if
• Driver Airbag a frontal, side, or rollover collision is severe enough to
require the front and/or side airbags to inflate. The
• Passenger Airbag
front airbag inflators are designed to provide different
• Side Curtain Airbags above Side Windows rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the
ORC. The ORC will detect roll overs, not rear impacts.
• Side Remote Acceleration Sensors
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
• Driver Side Seat Track Position Sensor
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
• Steering Wheel and Column the START or ON positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the knee bolster, the instru-
• Instrument Panel
ment panel, and the steering wheel and column. If the
• Interconnecting Wiring key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or
not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and will not
• Knee Impact Bolsters
inflate.
• The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning • The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
Light for 2.5 to 8 seconds for a self-check located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
when the ignition is first turned on. After the side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
of the system, it turns on the Airbag Warning Light inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime are possible, based on collision severity and occupant
will sound if the light comes on again after initial start size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
up. right side of the instrument panel separate and fold
out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size. The
WARNING! bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is
about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru-
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the
ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
driver and front passenger.
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right holes in the sides of the airbag. The passenger front
away. airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides
of the airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere
with your control of the vehicle.
• The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are de- • The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
signed to activate only in certain side or rollover the driver and the front passenger, and position every-
collisions. When the Occupant Restraint Control one for the best interaction with the front airbag.
(ORC) detects a collision requiring the window bags to
If a Deployment Occurs
2
inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the
vehicle, and both sides of the vehicle when rollover is
Occupant Restraint Control (ORC) detects a moderate-to-
sensed. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
severe frontal collision, to help restrain the driver and
inflate the window bag. The inflating window bag
front passenger, and then to immediately deflate.
pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the
way and covers the window. The airbag inflates in NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
about 30 milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time it need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if system.
items are positioned in the area where the window bag
If you do have a collision that deploys the airbags, any or
inflates. This especially applies to children. The win-
all of the following may occur:
dow bag is only about 3 in (8 cm) thick when it is
inflated. • The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those • It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a WARNING!
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
immediately.
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
• As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like seat belt pretensioners, and seat belt retractor assem-
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the bly, replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag possible.
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, Enhanced Accident Response Feature
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your power door locks will unlock automatically. The hazard
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc- lights will flash and the fuel will be cut off to the engine.
tions for cleaning. In addition, after the vehicle has stopped moving, the
interior lights will illuminate to aid visibility and remain
lit until the ignition switch is turned off.
NOTE: The interior lights can only be deactivated if the

key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is
driven. • You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket 2
Maintaining Your Airbag System equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
WARNING! airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may
protect you. Do not modify the components or apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper or vehicle body struc-
ture.
(Continued)
Airbag Warning Light block for blown fuses. Refer to “Fuses” in Section 7 of this
You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate manual. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
for your protection in an impact. The airbag system is
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
designed to be maintenance free. If any of the following
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-
promptly:
eters (see the following list) in an event data recorder
• Airbag Warning Light does not come on during the six prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or near
to eight seconds after the ignition switch is first turned deployment, and up to one-quarter second of high-speed
on, deceleration data during and/or after airbag deployment
or near-deployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an
• Remains on after the six to eight second interval, or
airbag deploys, or nearly deploys, and are otherwise
• Flickers, or comes on and remains on for any period of unavailable.
time while driving.
NOTE:
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine • A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
related gauges are not working, the airbag control mod- sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually in-
ule may also be disabled. The airbags may not be ready dicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant
to inflate for your protection. Promptly check the fuse airbag deployment.
• Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant).
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power). A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity
upon request. General data that does not identify par-
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo- 2
ration in aggregate crash databases, such as those main-
used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the
tained by the U.S. government and various states. Data of
possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order
a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify a
to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition
particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confi-
to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC, such
dentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by
investigations may be requested by customers, insurance
Chrysler LLC to any third party except when:
carriers, government officials, and professional crash
researchers, such as those associated with universities, 1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
and with hospital and insurance organizations. with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
preserved.
Chrysler LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or its
designated representative will first obtain permission of 2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC
the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usually product.
the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the elec-
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
tronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by a
4. Otherwise required by law. • Transmission gear selection

Data parameters that may be recorded: • Cruise control status
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status • Traction/stability control status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System status
the airbag system
Child Restraints
• Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
• ⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition time — babies and children, too. Every state in the United
cycles and vehicle mileage) States, and all Canadian provinces, require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
• Impact acceleration and angle
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-
• Seat belt status led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
the rear seats rather than in the front.
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
• Engine control status (including engine speed) children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child Infants and Child Restraints
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
child.
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
2
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
WARNING!
carriers and convertible child seats.
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
required to hold even an infant on your lap can
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats often
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing
matter how strong you are. The child and others
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
rearward-facing by children who weigh more than
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types
size.
of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint an-
chorage system (Refer to LATCH — Child Seat An-
chorage System in this section.)
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
WARNING!
restraint:
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passen-
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
ger airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An
Standards. Chrysler LLC also recommends that you
airbag deployment could cause severe injury or
try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will
death to infants in this position.
use it before you buy it.
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a • The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
collision. The child could be badly injured or weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex- weight and height limits.
actly when installing an infant or child restraint. • Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
• A rearward facing infant restraint should only be restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing infant not work when you need it.
restraint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag which may cause se- • Except for the second row center seating position, all
vere or fatal injury to the infant. passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch
plates. The second row center position has an auto-
matic locking retractor. Both types of seat belts are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into 2
tighten the belt (the cinching latch plate will keep the the buckle with the release button facing out.
belt tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen
• If the belt still cannot be tightened, or if pulling and
with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
tight if necessary). For the second row center seat belt
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
with the automatic locking retractor, pull the belt from
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
the retractor until there is enough allowance to pass it
again. If you still cannot make the child restraint
through the child restraint and slide the latch plate
secure, try a different seating position.
into the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it is fully
extended from the retractor. Allow the belt to return • Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the
into the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
tighten the lap portion about the child restraint. For
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
additional information, refer to ⬙Automatic Locking
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Mode⬙ earlier in this section.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the cause serious personal injury.
NOTE: For additional information refer to belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-
www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-SEATCHECK. positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg), and who are Children Too Large for Booster Seats
older than one year, can ride forward-facing in the Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
seats used in the forward-facing direction, are for chil- over the front of the seat when their back is against the
dren who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and who are seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
older than one year. These child seats are also held in the
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system (Refer to LATCH — Child • The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
Seat Anchorage System in this section.) as possible.
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing • Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit slouching can move the belt out of position.
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
the back.
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
Anchors and Tether for CHildren) the available attachments provided with your child re-
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child straint in any vehicle.
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
2
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
of reach of children. Remind all children in the vehicle
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played
structure.
with, and never leave your child unattended in the
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail- vehicle.
able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
child seats having flexible, webbing-mounted lower at-
also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
tachments. Child seats with fixed lower attachments
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
must be installed in the outboard positions only. Regard-
connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail-
less of the specific type of lower attachment, NEVER
able for some time. For some older child restraints, many
install LATCH-compatible child seats such that two seats
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
share a common lower anchorage.
If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at
in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback,
LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
center position. If your child restraints are not LATCH- run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and
compatible, you can only install the child restraints using seat cushion surfaces.
the vehicle’s seat belts. For typical installation instruc-
tions, refer to “Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint System”.
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
Latch Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-
rear seating position located on the back of the seat. facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a 2
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
First, loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next, attach the
lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage
bars, pushing aside the seat cover material. Then, locate
the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you
are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap
to the anchorage, being careful to route the tether strap to
provide the most direct path between the anchor and the
Tether Strap Mounting
child restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
For seat belts having an Automatic Locking Retractor

WARNING!
(ALR), pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough
Improper installation of a child restraint to the allowance to pass it through the child restraint and slide
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or the latch plate into the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it is
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or fully extended from the retractor. Allow the belt to return
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly into the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten
when installing an infant or child restraint. the lap portion about the child restraint. Refer to “Auto-
matic Locking Mode” earlier in this section.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
Belts
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch-
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. If
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on the
release button facing out.
shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the
belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight, If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
however, any seat belt system will loosen with time, so pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary. to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
2
Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the
hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
For the outboard seating positions, route the tether over
the head rests, and attach the hook to the tether anchor
located on the back of the seat.
WARNING!
Tether Strap Mounting
Always remove the subwoofer from the vehicle
whenever the tether anchors behind the subwoofer
are required for proper installation of a child re-
straining device. In the event of an accident, or under
severe vehicle maneuvers, leaving the subwoofer
unsecured in the vehicle could result in serious or
fatal injury to anyone in the vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).

WARNING!
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
increased head motion and possible injury to the
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
strap.
mental and should be avoided.
Transporting Pets The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. shown under “Engine Oil”, under “Maintenance Proce-
dures” in section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in USED.
your vehicle.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
interpreted as an indication of difficulty. vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat 2
belts.
SAFETY TIPS • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
Exhaust Gas
AREA.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
ously injured or killed.
follow these safety tips:
(Continued)
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
out of the area. damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
Vehicle
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode. Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
The light should come on and remain on for six to eight cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
Lights
2
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
rized dealer.
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Defroster
Door Latches
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your Fluid Leaks
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
inoperable. engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
The Vehicle
located and corrected immediately.
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . 81
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 ▫ Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 81
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 78 䡵 uconnect威 phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . 80 ▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
▫ Driver’s And Front Passenger Outside ▫ uconnect威 phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If Equipped . . 80
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 uconnect威 phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 ▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 118

䡵 Voice Recognition System (VR) — ▫ Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 120
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation . . . 110
䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter To
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Front Manual Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To
▫ Front Seat Adjustment — Recline . . . . . . . . . 116
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment . . . . . . 116
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Eight-Way Driver’s Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . 117
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Four-Way Passenger’s Power Seat — If
䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . 130 ▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

▫ Automatic Headlight System — ▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
▫ SmartBeams — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 133
3
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID
▫ Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System . . 140
Headlights Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . 141
▫ Instrument Panel And Interior Lights . . . . . . 134
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
䡵 Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . 144
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ High Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 ▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 ▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
䡵 Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 147 䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 ▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Rear Park Assist Warning Display . . . . . . . . 148 ▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . 158
▫ Enable/Disable The Rear Park Assist . . . . . . 150 ▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Service The Rear Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 ▫ Reprogramming A Single
HomeLink威 Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
䡵 Rear Camera — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ Turning The Rear Camera On Or Off — With
Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Turning The Rear Camera On Or Off — 䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Without Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 䡵 Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 ▫ Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
3
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 ▫ Rear Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 ▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
䡵 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Front Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 174
▫ Rear Power Outlet — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 163
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING! 3
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
Automatic Dimming Mirror inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
CAUTION! Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
three detent positions: full forward, full rearward and position.
normal.
Driver’s And Front Passenger Outside Automatic
Dimming Mirrors — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with outside automatic dim-
ming mirrors, they will operate when the inside auto-
matic dimming mirror is on. The outside mirrors operate
off the inside mirror switch and will automatically adjust
for annoying headlight glare when the inside mirror
does.
Outside Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the drivers door
trim panel next to the power door lock switch. A rotary Power Mirror Switch
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by

the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in this Section for further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
3
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
this Section for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
To access a n illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped
automatically.
This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for
increased coverage.
uconnect姞 phone — IF EQUIPPED NOTE:

• The uconnect威 phone requires a cellular phone
NOTE: The sales code RER and REU radios contain an
equipped with the Bluetooth威 ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
integrated uconnect威 phone. Refer to your “Navigation
Version 0.96 or higher. See the uconnect威 website for
User’s Manual” for uconnect威 phone operating instruc-
supported phones.
tions for these radios. Radio sales code can be located
on the lower right corner of the Radio faceplate. For uconnect威 customer support, visit the following
websites:
uconnect威 phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. uconnect威 allows you to • www.chrysler.com/uconnect
dial a phone number with your cellular phone using
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
simple voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or
⬙Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is • www.jeep.com/uconnect
transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the
• or call 1–877–855–8400
system will automatically mute your radio when using
the uconnect威 phone. uconnect威 allows you to transfer calls between the sys-
tem and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
The uconnect威 phone is driven through your Bluetooth威 radio or the mirror has the two control buttons (PHONE
“Hands-Free Profile” cellular phone. uconnect威 features Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button) that will
Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables enable you to access the system.
different electronic devices to connect to each other
Voice Recognition Button
without wires or a docking station, so uconnect威 phone
Actual button location may vary with the ra-
works no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be
dio. The individual buttons are described in the
3
it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone
“Operation” section.
is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
uconnect威 phone. The uconnect威 phone allows up to
The uconnect威 phone can be used with any Hands-Free
seven cellular phones to be linked to the system. Only
Profile certified Bluetooth威 cellular phone. See the
one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with the
uconnect威 website for supported phones. If your cellular
system at a time. The system is available in English,
phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset Profile)
Spanish, or French languages.
you may not be able to use any uconnect威 phone
Phone Button features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
The rearview mirror contains the microphone phone manufacturer for details.
for the system (depending on the type of
The uconnect威 phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
mirror and radio equipped), and either the
cle’s audio system. The volume of the uconnect威 phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control • For certain operations, compound commands can be
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
switch), if so equipped. ⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the uconnect威 phone such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on • For each feature explanation in this section, only the
certain radios. combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
Operation
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
Voice commands can be used to operate the uconnect威
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
phone and to navigate through the uconnect威 phone
mand ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
combined form command into two voice commands:
uconnect威 phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
specific command and then guided through the available
uconnect威 phone works best when you talk in a
options.
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another
Voice Command Tree
prompt.
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to ence your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following uconnect威 website may also provide detailed instructions
the beep. The uconnect威 phone will play all the options at for pairing.
any prompt if you ask for help.
The following are general phone to uconnect威 phone
To activate the uconnect威 phone from idle, simply press pairing instructions:
3
the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
directions. All uconnect威 phone sessions begin with a
press of the PHONE button on the radio control head. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and • When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a follow the audible prompts.
few instances the system will take you back to the
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
previous menu.
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
Pair (Link) uconnect威 phone to a Cellular Phone enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
To begin using your uconnect威 phone, you must pair four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone. after the initial pairing process.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to Dial by Saying a Number

give the uconnect威 phone a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being • The system will prompt you to say the number you
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular want to call.
phones to your uconnect威 phone. However, at any
• For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901⬙.
given time, only one cellular phone can be in use,
connected to your uconnect威 phone. The priority • The uconnect威 phone will confirm the phone number
allows the uconnect威 phone to know which cellular and then dial. The number will appear in the display
phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the of certain radios.
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
Call by Saying a Name
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
uconnect威 phone will use the priority three cellular • Press the PHONE button to begin.
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to
“Call.⬙
⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity⬙ in this section).
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
person you want to call. ⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
the name of the person you want to call. For example, long names helps the voice recognition and it is
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previ- recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or
ously stored name entry in the uconnect威 phonebook ⬙Robert⬙ instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
3
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
name in the phonebook, refer to ⬙Add Names to Your
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
uconnect威 Phonebook,⬙ in the phonebook.
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
• The uconnect威 system will confirm the name and then entry, if desired.
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
appear in the display of certain radios.
phonebook entry that you are adding.
Add Names to Your uconnect威 Phonebook
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
NOTE: Adding names to the uconnect威 phonebook is book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion. phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The uconnect威 phone will allow you to enter up to 32 • Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
names in the phonebook with each name having up to as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each made to the uconnect威 phone, for example, after you
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible start the vehicle.
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
supported by your phone, uconnect威 phone automati-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
cally downloads your cellular phone’s phonebook.
to the uconnect威 phone.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
Transfer From Cellular Phone
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
uconnect威 phone automatically downloads names (text
able, the previous downloaded phonebook is available
names) and number entries from the cellular phone’s
for use.
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See uconnect威 • Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu-
website for supported phones. lar phone is accessible.
• To call a name from downloaded (or uconnect威) • Only the cellular phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
Name” section. book.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or NOTE:

deleted on the uconnect威 phone. These can only be • The phone handset must support Bluetooth威 OBEX
edited on the cellular phone. The changes are trans- transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
ferred and updated to uconnect威 phone on the next
• Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
phone connection.
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
Phonebook Download — Single Entry and you may see a message on the phone display that
3
If equipped and supported by your phone, uconnect威 the Bluetooth威 link is busy. In this case, the user must
phone allows the user to download entries from their first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to
phone via Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the the uconnect威 phone, and then send the address book
PHONE button and say “Phonebook Download.” The entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone Owner’s
system prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the
Bluetooth威…” The system is now ready to accept phone- Bluetooth威 connection.
book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth威
• If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone
will only use the first 24 characters.
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send
these entries from your phone.
Edit uconnect威 Phonebook Entries After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
NOTE:
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
to the main menu.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
number to a name entry that already exists in the
deleted or edited.
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
• Press the PHONE button to begin. cellular and a home number, but you can add ”John
Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙
feature.
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
Delete uconnect威 Phonebook Entry
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit. NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
cellular, or pager) that you wish to edit. • Press the PHONE button to begin.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
phonebook entry that you are editing. ⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will Delete/Erase “All” uconnect威 Phonebook Entries
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook ⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
• The uconnect威 phone will ask you to verify that you
3
from the list, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
while the uconnect威 phone is playing the desired entry
and say ⬙Delete.⬙ • After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
• After you enter the name, the uconnect威 phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home, • Note that only the phonebook in the current language
work, cellular, pager, or all. Say the designation you is deleted.
wish to delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current deleted or edited.
language is deleted.
List All Names in the uconnect威 Phonebook
deleted or edited.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙ plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the uconnect威 phone. Check with your
• The uconnect威 phone will play the names of all the
cellular service provider for the features that you have.
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available. Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
• To call one of the names in the list, press the VOICE
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
RECOGNITION button during the playing of the
uconnect威 phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system,
desired name, and say ⬙Call.⬙
if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call.
NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙ Press the PHONE button to accept the call. To reject the
operations at this point. call, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
• The uconnect威 phone will then prompt you as to the
rejected.
number designation you wish to call.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
• The selected number will be dialed.
Currently in Progress
Phone Call Features If a call is currently in progress and you have another
The following features can be accessed through the incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
uconnect威 phone if the feature(s) are available on your call waiting that you normally hear when using your
cellular phone. Press the PHONE button to place the Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
current call on hold and answer the incoming call. To put a call on hold, press the PHONE button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
NOTE: The uconnect威 phone compatible phones in the
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it. Toggling Between Calls
3
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
Making a Second Call While Current Call is in
press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep,
Progress
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say ⬙Dial⬙
time.
or ⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while Conference Call
the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
refer to ⬙Toggling Between Calls⬙ in this section. To hold), press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
combine two calls, refer to ⬙Conference Call⬙ in this a double beep indicating that the two calls have been
section. joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
To initiate three-way calling, press the VOICE RECOG- ⬙Redial.⬙
NITION button while a call is in progress, and make a
• The uconnect威 phone will call the last number that
second phone call, as described under ⬙Making a Second
was dialed from your cellular phone.
Call While Current Call is in Progress.⬙ After the second
call has established, press and hold the PHONE button NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
until you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls uconnect威 phone.
have been joined into one conference call.
Call Continuation
Call Termination Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the PHONE uconnect威 phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
continue on the uconnect威 phone either until the call
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
cessation of the call on the uconnect威 phone and
Redial transfer of the call to the cellular phone.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can • Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
continue on the uconnect威 phone for a certain dura- the language selection.
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
from the uconnect威 phone to the cellular phone.
voice commands will be in that language.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to
NOTE: After every uconnect威 phone language change 3
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
OFF.
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
uconnect姞 phone Features specific and usable across all languages.
Language Selection Emergency Assistance
To change the language that the uconnect威 phone is If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is
using: reachable:
• Press the PHONE button to begin. • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
If the phone is not reachable and the uconnect威 phone is • If supported, this number may be programmable on
operational, you may reach the emergency number as some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button
follows: and say ‘Setup’, followed by ‘Emergency’.
• Press the PHONE button to begin. • The uconnect威 phone does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the
cell phone directly.
⬙Emergency⬙ and the uconnect威 phone will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
WARNING!
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico. Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
uconnect威 phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
NOTE:
in emergency situations, when the cell phone has
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
network coverage and stays paired to the uconnect威
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
phone.
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available cellular service
and area.
Towing Assistance Paging

If you need towing assistance: To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say work properly with the uconnect威 phone.
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
Voice Mail Calling
3
NOTE: To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the with Automated Systems.⬙
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
Working with Automated Systems
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
This method is used in instances where one generally has
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
Mexico City in Mexico).
navigating through an automated telephone system.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
You can use your uconnect威 phone to access a voice mail
some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
and say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
or automated customer service line. Some services re-
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the uconnect威 phone.
When calling a number with your uconnect威 phone that send the corresponding phone number associated with
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
on your cellular phone keypad, you can press the VOICE
NOTE:
RECOGNITION button and say the sequence you wish
• You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
to enter, followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example, if
network configurations. This is normal.
required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4
6 #), you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button • Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
and say, ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying a number, or sequence of out settings that are too short and may not allow the
numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙ is also to be used for use of this feature.
navigating through an automated customer service cen-
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
ter menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager.
The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you
You can also send stored uconnect威 phonebook entries as wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager recognition command immediately. For example, if a
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to prompt is asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button a...,⬙ you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
and say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the and say, ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without
name or number and say the name of the phonebook having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
entry you wish to send. The uconnect威 phone will then
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
from confirming your choices (e.g., the uconnect威 phone keypad and still use the uconnect威 phone (while dialing
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it). via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 cellular 3
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The uconnect威 phone will play audio system. The uconnect威 phone will work the same
the current confirmation prompt status and you will as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
be given the choice to change it.
NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send
Phone and Network Status Indicators the dial ring to the uconnect威 phone to play it on the
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
your cellular phone, the uconnect威 phone will provide may feel that the call did not go through even though the
notification to inform you of your phone and network call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
status when you are attempting to make a phone call hear the audio.
using uconnect威 phone. The status is given for roaming,
network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF) uconnect威 phone or vice versa, press the VOICE REC-
When you mute the uconnect威 phone, you will still be OGNITION button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
uconnect威 phone and Cellular Phone
order to mute the uconnect威 phone:
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
• Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button. electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
In order to un-mute the uconnect威 phone:
connection between a uconnect威 phone paired cellular
• Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button. phone and the uconnect威 phone, follow the instructions
described in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The uconnect威 phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
ferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect威 phone “Setup Phone Pairing.”
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
• When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
from your uconnect威 phone paired cellular phone to the
• The uconnect威 phone will play the phone names of all • The selected phone will be used for the next phone
paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the call. If the selected phone is not available, the
lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired phone uconnect威 phone will return to using the highest
being announced, press the VOICE RECOGNITION priority phone present in or near (approximately
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “de-
Delete uconnect威 phone Paired Cellular Phones
3
lete” a paired phone.
Select Another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
phone paired with the uconnect威 phone. ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• Press the PHONE button to begin. • At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts. • You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
at any time while the list is being played, and then
• You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
choose the phone you wish to delete.
at any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone that you wish to select.
Things You Should Know About Your uconnect姞 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
phone uconnect威 phone. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
uconnect威 phone Tutorial
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
blower fan switched off.
PHONE button and say “uconnect威 Tutorial.”
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
Voice Training
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the uconnect威 To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
training mode, follow one of the two following proce- procedure and follow the prompts.
dures:
Voice Recognition (VR)
From outside the uconnect威 phone mode (e.g., from radio
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
mode):
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
• Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for console (if equipped) and the mirror.
five seconds until the session begins, or,
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the
⬙Setup, Voice Training⬙ command.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would • When navigating through an automated system such
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
you. speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking • Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
during a voice recognition period. not in motion is recommended.
3
• Performance is maximized under: • It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the uconnect威 phonebook.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• Phonebook (Downloaded and uconnect威 phone Local)
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
name recognition rate is optimized when the entries
• low road noise, are not similar.
• smooth road surface, • You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
• fully closed windows,
• Even though international dialing for most number
• dry weather condition.
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking number combinations may not be supported.
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
compromised with the convertible top down. lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Far End Audio Performance • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
• Audio quality is maximized under:
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
• low-to-medium blower setting,
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
• low-to-medium vehicle speed, the uconnect威 phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
• low road noise,
off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in
• smooth road surface, Bluetooth威 ON mode.
• fully closed windows, Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
• dry weather conditions, and
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
• operation from the driver’s seat. must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the uconnect威 phone.
3
3
Voice Commands Voice Commands

Primary Alternate(s) Primary Alternate(s)
zero call
one cancel
two confirmation prompts
three continue
four delete
five dial
six download
seven edit
eight emergency
nine English
star (*) erase all
plus (+) Espanol
pound (#) Francais
add location help
all home
Voice Commands Voice Commands

Primary Alternate(s) Primary Alternate(s)
language return to main menu return or main menu
list names select phone select
list phones send 3
mobile set up phone settings or phone
mute set up
mute off towing assistance
new entry transfer call
no uconnect威 Tutorial
pager try again
pair a phone voice training
phone pairing pairing work
phonebook phone book yes
previous
record again
redial
General Information VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (VR) — IF

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and EQUIPPED
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation
following conditions:
This Voice Recognition system allows you to
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
the party responsible for compliance could void the player, and a memo recorder.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
• This device must accept any interference received, the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com-
including interference that may cause undesired mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
operation. raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions and all attention should be
kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may
result in an accident causing serious injury or death.
When you press the VR button, you will hear a beep. The These commands are universal and can be used from any
beep is your signal to give a command. menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
options. listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
3
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the VR button, listen for the beep, and say When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
your command. a normal speaking volume.
Pressing the VR button while the system is speaking is The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
known as “barging in.” The system will be interrupted dows are closed, and the heater/air-conditioning fan is
and after the beep you can add or change commands. set to low.
This will become helpful once you start to learn the
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
options.
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
To hear the first available Menu, press the VR button and
“Help”, or “Main Menu”.
say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
Commands In this mode, you can say the following commands:

The Voice Recognition system understands two types of
• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported • “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
radio mode is active.
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
Changing the Volume
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button.
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”). Wave — If Equipped)
To switch to the AM band say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
this mode, you may say the following commands:
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni-
tion system is speaking. Please note the volume setting • “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
for VR is different than the audio system.
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
Main Menu
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button. You may say
“Main Menu” to switch to the main menu. • “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Radio FM • “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)

To switch to the FM band say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station) 3
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
Disc
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
To switch to the disc mode say “Disc”. In this mode, you
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio • “Track” (#) (to change the track)
To switch to satellite radio mode say “Sat” or “Satellite
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands: • “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
spoken number)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
Memo − “Previous” (to play the previous memo)

To switch to the voice recorder mode say “Memo”. In this
− “Delete” (to delete a memo)
mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording you may press the VR button to stop record- System Setup
ing. You proceed by saying one of the following To switch to system setup say “Setup”. In this mode, you
commands: may say the following commands:
− “Save” (to save the memo) • “Language German”
− “Continue” (to continue recording) • “Language Dutch”
− “Delete” (to delete the recording) • “Language Italian”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) • “Language English”
— During the playback you may press the VR button
• “Language French”
to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands: • “Language Spanish”
− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo) • “Tutorial”
− “Next” (to play the next memo) • “Voice Training”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the VR SEATS

button first and wait for the beep before speaking the
Front Manual Seat Adjustment
“Barge In” commands.
Move the seat forward or rearward using the adjustment
Voice Training bar. Lift up on the bar located on the front of the seat near
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- the floor. Position the seat and be sure the latch engages
nizing their voice commands or numbers, uconnect威 fully.
3
phone Voice Training feature may be used.
WARNING!
1. Press the VR button, say “System Setup” and once you
are in that menu then say “Voice Training.” This will train Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
your own voice to the system and will improve recogni- dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
tion. cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
uconnect威 phone. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Front Seat Adjustment — Recline

To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back, and release the lever • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
lever, lean forward, and release the lever. belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
WARNING! using a seat belt properly.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment
seat belt is no longer resting against your chest. In The manual lumbar support adjustment lever is located
a collision, you could slide under the seat belt and on the right side of the driver’s seat (all models) and on
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the re- the left side of the passenger’s seat (if equipped). Moving
cliner only when the vehicle is parked. the lumbar control lever forward and rearward will
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, increase or decrease the lumbar support.
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
(Continued)
Manual Lumbar Control Power Seat Switches

Eight-Way Driver’s Power Seat Four-Way Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
The driver’s power seat switches are located on the The front passenger’s power seat switches are located on
outboard side of the driver’s seat lower side trim. The the outboard side of the passenger seat lower side trim.
bottom switch controls up/down, forward/rearward, The bottom switch controls forward/rearward adjust-
and tilt adjustment. The top switch controls the seatback ment. The top switch controls the seatback recline adjust-
recline adjustment. ment.
NOTE: The four-way seat does not have an up/down

adjustment.
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Adjustable head
restraints should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as
High as practical. The head restraints have a locking
button which must be pushed in to lower the head
restraint to all positions. The restraints may be raised
without pushing in the button.
Adjustable Head Restraints

Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front driver and passenger seats are heated. The
controls for each heater are located near the bottom
center of the instrument panel (below the heater/air
conditioning controls). The heaters provide the same
average heat level for both the cushion and the seatback.
After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from a two to one, indicating the change. The Low-level setting
High or Low heat setting. Illuminated LEDs on each will turn Off automatically after approximately 30 min-
switch indicate the level of heat in use. utes.
Press the switch once to select High-level heat- NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
ing. Press the switch a second time to select within two to five minutes.
Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
3
to shut the heating elements Off. Two indica- WARNING!
tors will illuminate for High, one for Low, and none for
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
Off.
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
When the High-level setting is selected, the heater will spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes haustion or other physical condition must exercise
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
normal High-level. If the High-level setting is selected, even at Low temperatures, especially if used for
the system will automatically switch to Low-level after long periods of time.
approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At
(Continued)
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. To avoid
heated seat surfaces coming in contact with each
other and potential seat overheating, ALWAYS
ensure that the seat heater is in the Off position
(amber lights indicate High/Low/Off) before plac-
ing any of the seats into a folded flat position (if
equipped).
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped Rear Heated Seat Switches

On vehicles equipped with rear heated seats, the seats Press the switch once to select High-level heat-
closest to the doors are heated. The controls for these ing. Press the switch a second time to select
seats are located on the rear of the center console. Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut the heating elements Off. Two indica-
tors will illuminate for High, one for Low, and none for
Off.
When the High-level setting is selected, the heater will

WARNING!
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
normal High-level. If the High-level setting is selected, because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
the system will automatically switch to Low-level after spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At haustion or other physical condition must exercise 3
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
two to one, indicating the change. The Low-level setting even at Low temperatures, especially if used for
will turn Off automatically after approximately 30 min- long periods of time.
utes. • Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
within two to five minutes. may cause the seat heater to overheat. To avoid
heated seat surfaces coming in contact with each
other and potential seat overheating, always en-
sure that the seat heater is in the Off position
(amber lights indicate High/Low/Off) before plac-
ing any of the seats into a folded flat position (if
equipped).
60/40 Split Rear Seat

To Lower Rear Seat
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for
extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating
room.
NOTE: Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback to
fold down easily.
1. Pull the release strap (toward the front of the vehicle)
to release.
Rear Seat Release
NOTE: Do not fold the rear seat down with the center
seat belt buckled.
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
WARNING!
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position)
should not be used as a play area by children when
the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously 3
injured in an accident. Children should be seated
and using the proper restraint system.
Folding Rear Seat

To Raise Rear Seat
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interfer-
ence from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
Storage (Rear Seat Armrest) — If Equipped

The rear seat may be equipped with a center storage
armrest.
Armrest Storage Latch

DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
Once programmed, the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the
Rear Seat Armrest driver’s door panel can be used to recall the driver’s seat,
Press the latch and lift the top of the armrest to access the driver’s outside mirror, adjustable brake and accelerator
storage bin. pedals, and radio station preset settings. Your Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can also be pro- position. The memory system can accommodate up to
grammed to recall the same positions when the UN- four RKE transmitters, each one linked to either of the
LOCK button is pressed. two memory positions.
Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter to Memory
3
NOTE: Each time the S (SET) button and a numbered
button 1 or 2 are pressed, you erase the memory settings
for that button and store a new one.
1. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.
2. Press the driver door memory button number 1 if you
are setting the memory for driver 1, or button number 2
if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The system
Driver Memory Switches will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system to
Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters. One complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3.
or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either memory 3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s sideview
mirror to the desired positions.
4. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired 11. Select ⬙Remote Linked to Memory⬙ in the Electronic
positions. Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter ⬙Yes⬙. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up
Customer-Programmable Features” in Section 4 for more
to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set).
information.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
12. Repeat the above steps to set the next memory
remove the key.
position, using the other numbered memory button, or to
7. Press and release the S (SET) button located on the link another RKE transmitter to memory.
driver’s door.
Memory Position Recall
8. Within five seconds, press and release memory button
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
transmitters.
memory button number 1 on the driver’s door, or the
10. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
the ON position. memory position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press 3. Press and release the memory S (SET) button located
memory button number 2 on the driver’s door, or the on the driver’s door.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
4. Within five seconds, press and release memory button
memory position 2.
1 on the driver’s door.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory
buttons on the drivers door during a recall (S, 1, or 2).
5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK 3
button on the RKE transmitter.
When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, driver’s
mirror, and the pedals stop moving. A delay of one To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either
second will occur before another recall can be selected. memory position, repeat steps 1 through 5 for each RKE
transmitter.
To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory
NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, and
to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.
remove the key.
Refer to Remote Linked to Memory under ⬙Electronic
2. Press and release memory button number 1. The Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer-
system will recall any memory settings stored in position Programmable Features⬙ in Section 4 for more
1. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall information.
before continuing to Step 3.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat driving position when the key is placed into the
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning ignition, and turned out of the LOCK position toward
which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the the ACC/ON position.
vehicle.
The Easy Entry/Exit feature will be automatically dis-
There are two possible Easy Entry/Exit adjustments abled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0.9 in
available: (23 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there
is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy
• The seat cushion will move rearward approximately
Exit/Entry.
2.5 in (60 mm), if the starting position of the seat is
greater than or equal to 2.67 in (68 mm) forward of the Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
rear seat stop when the key is removed from the Entry/Exit position.
ignition switch. The seat will then move forward
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled
approximately 2.5 in (60 mm) when the key is placed
when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position.
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
• The seat will move to the position located 0.3 in the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle
(8 mm) forward of the rear stop if the starting position Information Center (EVIC). Refer to ⬙Electronic Vehicle
is between 0.9 to 2.67 in (23 to 68 mm) forward of the Information Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable
rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition Features⬙ in Section 4 for more information.
switch. The seat will move forward to the memory/
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
panel and in front of the driver’s door.
3
Safety Latch Location
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of
Hood Release
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left,
and lift the hood.
Headlights and Parking Lights

WARNING!
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when for parking light operation. Turn to the second detent for
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision. headlight operation. Turn to the third detent for AUTO
Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before headlight operation (if equipped).
driving.
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
headlights, turn signals, headlight beam selection, instru-
ment panel light dimming, passing light, interior
courtesy/dome lights, and optional fog lights. The mul-
tifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering
wheel.
Headlight Switch
Automatic Headlight System — If Equipped If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive Wiper
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the third detent System” and it is activated, the headlights will automati-
to activate the automatic headlight system. cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles
within approximately one minute, and they will turn off
This system performs two functions. With the engine
approximately four minutes after the wipers completely
running and the multifunction lever in the AUTO posi-
tion, the headlights will turn on and off based on the
stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers and Washers” in this 3
section.
surrounding light levels.
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
daytime, the instrument panel lights will automatically
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
dim to the lower nighttime intensity. Refer to “Instru-
also has this customer programmable feature. When your
ment Panel and Interior Lights” for setting the instru-
headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is
ment panel lights to full daytime intensity.
running, they will automatically turn on when the wiper
system is on.
SmartBeams — If Equipped To Activate

The SmartBeam system provides increased forward light-
1. Select “Auto Headlamp Low/High Beams? — Low/
ing at night by automating high beam control through
High Beam.” Refer to “EVIC — Customer-Programmable
the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside
Features” in Section 4 of this manual.
rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light
and automatically switches from high beams to low 2. Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO
beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view. headlight position.
NOTE: If the windshield or SmartBeam mirror is re- 3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
placed, the SmartBeam mirror must be re-aimed to front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
dealer.
at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped

The high beam headlights come on at a low intensity
1. Pull back on the multifunction lever to manually
level whenever the engine is running, and the transmis-
deactivate the system (normal operation of low beams).
sion is not in the PARK position. The lights will remain
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to on until the ignition switch is turned to LOCK/ACC, or
reactivate the system. the parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must 3
be used for normal nighttime driving.
NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Only
Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions (sticker, toll box, This feature prevents the headlights from interfering
etc.) on the windshield or camera lens will cause the with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling
system to function improperly. automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in
reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.
Instrument Panel and Interior Lights

When the multifunction lever is in the parking light,
headlight, or AUTO position (if equipped), rotating the
center portion of the lever up and down will increase and
decrease the brightness (dimmer control) of the instru-
ment panel lights. Full daytime brightness on all elec-
tronic displays (odometer, overhead console, radio, and
Automatic Climate Control (if equipped) is obtained by
rotating the center portion of the control to the first
detent above the dimmer range. Rotating the control to
the second detent above the dimmer range turns the
interior lights on. Rotating the control to the “Off”
(extreme bottom) position disables all the interior lights, Dimmer Control
even when the doors and liftgate are open. While in the
“Off” position the instrument panel lighting is at the
lowest light level and may not be suitable for night
driving.
Battery Saver Feature turn lights, low beam headlights, or Auto headlights and
If the multifunction lever is left in the interior light pull out the end of the multifunction lever. A light in the
position, parking light position, or the headlight position instrument cluster shows when the fog lights are on.
when the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position,
the battery saver feature will automatically turn off the
exterior and interior lights after eight minutes. Normal 3
operation will resume when the ignition is turned ON or
when the headlight switch is turned to another position.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
switch has been turned to LOCK/ACC, a chime will
sound when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog light switch is located in the multifunction
lever. To activate the fog lights, turn on the park/ Front Fog Light Control
NOTE:
• Turning on the high beam headlights turns off the fog
lights.
• A front fog light is a lighting device that provides
illumination in front of the vehicle under conditions of
fog, rain, snow, or dust. The front fog lights supple-
ment the lower beam of a standard headlight system.
• Proper aim and adjustment of the front fog lights
should be made to prevent excessive glare for other
drivers.
Turn Signals Turn Signal Control
Move the multifunction lever up or down, and the
Turn Signal Auto-Mode
arrows on each side of the instrument cluster will flash to
Tap the multifunction lever once, and the turn signal (left
show proper operation of the left and right turn signal
or right) will flash three times and automatically turn off.
lights. You can signal a lane change by moving the
multifunction lever partially up or down.
High Beam Switch Flash-to-Pass

Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch You can signal another vehicle by lightly pulling the
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will
towards you to switch the headlights back to low beam. cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on
until the lever is released.
Headlight Time Delay
3
This feature delays turning off the headlights for 30, 60,
or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF. To
activate the headlight delay, the multifunction lever must
be rotated to the “Off” position after the ignition switch
is turned to LOCK/ACC. Only the headlights will illu-
minate during this time. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) – Customer-Programmable
Features” in Section 4 to turn this feature “On/Off” or set
the time interval.
High Beam/Low Beam Select Interior Lights
The interior lighting consists of courtesy lights (below the
instrument panel), an overhead console light (which
contains both driver and passenger reading lights), read-

ing lights (located above the rear doors), and a rear cargo
light. Opening a door, pressing the UNLOCK button on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or turning
the center of the multifunction control lever to the
extreme up position, will activate all interior courtesy
lights.
Front Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each
light can be turned on by pressing the recessed area of the
lens. To turn these lights off, press the recessed area of the
lens a second time. There are also reading lights located Front Map/Reading Lights
above the rear doors. Each light can be turned on by
pressing the front recessed area of the lens. To turn these
lights off, press the recessed area of the lens a second
time.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The front and rear wipers and washers are operated by a
switch in the right side control lever. Turn the end of the
control lever to select Low, High, or one of the five speed
sensitive intermittent windshield wiper speeds. Refer to
“Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System” in this 3
section. For information on the rear wiper and washer,
refer to “Rear Window Features” in this section.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch

NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that pre-
vents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage
to the wiper motor may occur.
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold Mist
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Pull down and
after the lever is released, and then resume the intermit- release the control lever for a single wiping cycle.
tent interval previously selected.
Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers Use one of the five intermittent wiper speeds when
will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off. weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable pause between cycles, desirable. Turn the end of
WARNING! the lever to one of the five delay positions for the desired
delay interval. The delay can be regulated from a maxi-
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
mum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles, to a
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
cycle every 1/2 second.
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
windshield with the defroster before and during If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
windshield washer use. delay times will be doubled.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped • The rain sensing feature may not function properly
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The shield.
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
• Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
may reduce rain sensor performance.
the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings 3
to activate this feature. • A customer programmable feature in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) allows the Rain
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
Sense feature to be turned off. Refer to “Electronic
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer-
sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensi-
Programmable Features” in Section 4 of this manual.
tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less The rain sensing system has protection features for the
wiper sensitivity. Settings 4 and 5 can be used if the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in following conditions:
the OFF position when not using the system.
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
NOTE: first turned ON, the rain sensing system will not
• The rain sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the Low or High speed position.
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed

is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission in NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU-
TRAL position, the rain sensing system will not oper-
ate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
Tilt Steering Column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
the steering column. move the steering wheel upward or downward as de-
sired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. adjusted without compromising safety or comfort in
To lock the steering column in position, push the control actuating the pedals.
handle upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
3
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The
telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or
driving without the telescoping adjustment locked
could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED

This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals
to move toward or away from the driver to provide Adjustable Pedal Switch
improved position with the steering wheel. The adjust- Press the bottom of the switch to move the pedals
able pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of forward (away from the driver).
driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position.
The position of the brake and accelerator pedals can be
Press the top of the switch to move the pedals rearward

CAUTION!
(toward the driver).
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedal’s
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
• The pedals can be adjusted while driving. to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
adjustable pedal’s path.
REVERSE (R) or when the Electronic Speed Control is
ON. A message will be displayed in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) if the pedals are ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over
out (“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In (40 km/h) for 3.7L, 4.7L, and 5.7L engines; and 14 mph
Reverse”). Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information (23 km/h) for 3.0L diesel engines.
Center (EVIC) in Section 4 for more information. The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always 3
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set At A Desired Speed

When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
down on the lever and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Electronic Speed Control Lever
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
To Activate
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system To Deactivate
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the Electronic
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be Speed Control lever toward you, or normal brake pres-
turned off when not in use. sure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic
Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory. that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition 3 mph (5 km/h) (3.7L, 4.7L, 5.7L, and 3.0L diesel en-
switch OFF erases the set speed memory. gines).
To Resume Speed To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is on,
To resume a previously set speed, push the RESUME push down and hold SET DECEL. Release the lever when
ACCEL lever up and release. Resume can be used at any the desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h) for 3.7L, 4.7L, and 5.7L set.
engines, and 14 mph (23 km/h) for 3.0L diesel engines.
Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph
To Vary The Speed Setting (2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the lever is tapped,
When the Electronic Speed Control is on, speed can be speed decreases.
increased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system has been
Release the lever when the desired speed is reached, and
designed to shut down if multiple speed control switch
the new speed will be set.
functions are operated simultaneously in order to ensure
Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph proper operation. If this occurs, the system can be
(2 km/h) (3.7L, 4.7L, 5.7L, and 3.0L diesel engines) speed reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control
increase. Each time the lever is tapped, speed increases so switch ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle
SET speed.
To Accelerate For Passing Section and Note Section for limitations of this system
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the and recommendations.
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
The Rear Park Assist will remember the last system state
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the the ignition is changed to the ON position.
vehicle set speed.
3
The Rear Park Assist can be active only when the shift
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains lever is in REVERSE. If the Rear Park Assist is enabled at
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on this shift lever position, the system will be active until the
moderate hills is normal. vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph
(18 km/h) or above. The system will be active again if the
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approxi-
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
mately 10 mph (16 km/h).
Control.
Rear Park Assist Sensors
REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED The four Rear Park Assist Sensors, located in the rear
The Rear Park Assist provides visible and audible indi- fascia, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
cations of the distance between the rear fascia and the the sensors’ field of view.
detected obstacle when backing up. Refer to the Warning
The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12

to 59 in (30 to 150 cm) from the rear fascia in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location and
orientation of the obstacle and the type of obstacle.
Rear Park Assist Warning Display
The Rear Park Assist Warning Display, located in the
headliner near the flipper glass, provides both visible and
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia and the detected obstacle.
When the ignition is turned to the ON position, the

warning display will turn ON all of its LEDs for about
one second. Each side of the warning display has six
yellow and two red LEDs. The vehicle is close to the
obstacle when the red LED is ON.
The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow

LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles. The
following chart shows the warning display operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES
DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM: LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL
3
REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER
1st LED 59 in (150 cm) Yellow Yes, Half Second
2nd LED 51 in (130 cm) Yellow None
3rd LED 45 in (115 cm) Yellow None
4th LED 31.5 in (80 cm) 39 in (100 cm) Yellow None
5th LED 25.5 in (65 cm) 33.5 in (85 cm) Yellow None
6th LED 20 in (50 cm) 28 in (70 cm) Yellow None
7th LED 16 in (40 cm) 20 in (50 cm) Red Yes, Intermittent
8th LED 6 in (15 cm) 12 in (30 cm) Red Yes, Continuous
NOTE: The Rear Park Assist system will MUTE the
radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Enable/Disable The Rear Park Assist When the switch is pressed to disable the system, the
The Rear Park Assist can be enabled and disabled with a instrument cluster will display the “PARK ASSIST DIS-
switch located on the upper switch bank of the instru- ABLED” message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
ment panel. tion Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual. When the
shift lever is changed to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the instrument cluster will actuate a single
chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
message.
The Rear Park Assist Switch LED will be ON when the
Rear Park Assist is disabled or defective. The Rear Park
Assist Switch LED will be OFF when the system is
enabled.
Service The Rear Park Assist
When the Rear Park Assist is defective, the instrument
cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
Rear Park Assist Switch cycle, and it will display the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist

WARNING!
Clean the Rear Park Assist Sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could using the Rear Camera System. Always check care-
damage the sensors. fully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or 3
REAR CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
Vehicles with a uconnect威 tunes radio may be equipped for the safety of your surroundings and must con-
with a rearview camera (located on the rear liftgate) that tinue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
allows you to see an on-screen image (on the navigation so can result in serious injury or death.
radio screen) of the rear of your vehicle, whenever the
vehicle is put into REVERSE.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, the Rear Camera system
should only be used as a parking aid. The Rear
Camera system is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
(Continued)
4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting

CAUTION! (Continued)
⬙enable rear camera in reverse⬙ soft key.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using the Rear Camera system 5. Press the “save” soft key.
to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. 6. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, an image of
It is recommended that the driver look frequently the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to
over his/her shoulder when using the Rear Camera ⬙check entire surroundings⬙ displayed across the top of
system. the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or anything else builds up on 7. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. appears again.
Turning the Rear Camera On or Off — With Turning the Rear Camera On or Off — Without
Navigation Radio Navigation Radio
1. Press the ⬙menu⬙ hard key. 1. Press the ⬙menu⬙ hard key.
2. Select ⬙system setup⬙ soft key. 2. Select ⬙system setup⬙ soft key.
3. Press the “camera setup” soft key. 3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
⬙enable rear camera in reverse⬙ soft key.
4. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, an image of

the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to
⬙check entire surroundings⬙ displayed across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
5. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the audio screen appears
3
again.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,
an optional universal garage door opener (HomeLink威),
storage for sunglasses, and optional power sunroof
Overhead Console
switches.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
reading lights.
Press the lens to turn these lights on. Press a second time
to turn the lights off.
The lights also turn on when a front door or rear door is The HomeLink威 buttons are located in the overhead
opened. The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK console, and contain one, two, or three dots/lines desig-
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed. nating the different HomeLink威 channels.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design.
Push the finger depression on the overhead console to
open. Push the finger depression to close.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s HomeLink威 Buttons
battery. NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
Programming HomeLink姞
WARNING!
Before You Begin
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
erase all channels before you begin training.
Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate. Only use this trans- To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up 3
ceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop to 20 seconds. The EVIC will display “CLEARING
and reverse” feature as required by federal safety CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC mes-
standards. This includes most garage door opener sage states “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
garage door opener without these safety features.
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed
Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
to HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or as-
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
sistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan- Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training.
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
cause serious injury or death.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
from the HomeLink威 buttons while keeping the EVIC may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted
display in view. in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
For optimal training, point the battery end of the hand- 4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button. If
held transmitter away from the HomeLink威. the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now
state “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.”
3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威 button and the hand-held transmitter button If the EVIC display still states “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
until the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL # ING” repeat Step 3.
TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
NOTE: After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the
Then release both the HomeLink威 and hand-held trans- garage door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the
mitter buttons. garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed
If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat
to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code System.”
Step 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the
original hand-held transmitter. 5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
It may take up to 30 seconds, or longer, in rare cases. The
the “learn” or “training” button.
garage door may open and close while you train.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna 6. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “training”
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is button. The name and color of the button may vary by
NOT the button normally used to open and close the manufacturer.
door).
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the “Learn” button has been pressed.
3
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig- EVIC display will change from “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of ING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
transmission – which may not be long enough for
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.
at this time.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner. Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威” earlier in this section.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage Using HomeLink姞
door or gate motor. To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
HomeLink” Step 3 with the following:
etc.) The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button used at any time.
while you press and release - every two seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLink威
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow these steps:
Troubleshooting Tips
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button for 3
20 seconds until the EVIC display states “CHANNEL # • Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
TRAINING.” Do not release the button.
• Press the learn button on the garage door opener to
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program- complete the training for rolling code.
ming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
Security to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
If you are having any problems or require assistance,
in your vehicle.
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
20 seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELS
CLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. Indi-
vidual channels cannot be erased.
General Information POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console.
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration num- Power Sunroof Switch
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi-
cations were met.
Opening Sunroof — Express

WARNING!
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
• Never leave children in a vehicle, with the key in will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat- will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called
tended children, can become entrapped by the “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. 3
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
Closing Sunroof — Express
injury or death.
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always “Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sun- Pinch Protect Feature
roof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
any object to project through the sunroof opening. the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
Injury may result. struction is detected, the sunroof will automatically re-
tract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press
the switch forward and release to Express Close.
Pinch Protect Override NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing open.
the sunroof, press the switch forward and hold for two
Wind Buffeting
seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
to move towards the closed position.
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
pressed. windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
Venting Sunroof — Express
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
Press and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button, and the sunroof will
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”,
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
stop the sunroof.
Sunroof Maintenance
Sunshade Operation
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
the glass panel.
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Ignition Off Operation

The power sunroof switches remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
3
sunroof is fully closed.
POWER OUTLETS
Front Power Outlet
To the left and right of the convenience tray (lower center
of instrument panel) is an outlet for electric-powered Rear Power Outlet
accessories. Pull lightly on the tab of the plastic cover to The rear power outlet is a direct feed from the battery and
access the outlet. will receive power whether the ignition is in the ON or
Rear Power Outlet — If Equipped LOCK position. All accessories connected to this outlet
The rear power outlet (if equipped) is located in the left should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not
rear cargo area. in use to protect the battery against discharge.
WARNING! CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death: • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
• Do not use a three-prong adapter. power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles. use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
• Do not touch with wet hands. plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
the vehicle. and/or prevent engine starting.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
electric shock and failure. vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and
There is a 115-Volt, 150-Watt inverter outlet located on the other low power devices requiring power up to 150
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playsta-
current. tion3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools. Due to built-in overload protection, the
power outlet will shut down if the power rating is 3
exceeded. Each device to be powered should be checked
first to make sure it does not exceed the outlet’s 150 Watts
maximum rating.
Power Inverter
Press the power inverter switch (located on the upper NOTE:

switch bank) to turn the power on to the outlet. Press the • When the power inverter switch is pressed, there will
switch again to turn the power off. be a delay of approximately one second before the
inverter status indicator turns ON. The status indica-
tor of the AC power inverter indicates whether the
inverter is producing AC power.
• Due to built-in overload protection, the inverter will
shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
Power Inverter Switch • Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CUPHOLDERS
In the center console, there are two cupholders for the
front seat passengers.
Rear Cupholders
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Light
Front Cupholders
The cargo area light is activated by opening the liftgate,
The rear passengers have access to two cupholders that opening any door, or by rotating the dimmer control on
pull out from the lower center of the rear seat. the multifunction lever to the extreme top position. If all
doors are closed and only the liftgate is open, pushing on
the cargo light lens surface will turn off all interior lamps. Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
Push on the lens surface a second time to restore the
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
interior lights to normal operation.
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
Rear Storage Compartment protect passengers from loose cargo.
The rear storage compartment is located on the driver’s
To cover the cargo area:
side behind the second row seat.
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
Rear Storage Compartment

WARNING!
In an accident, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle
could cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden
stop and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store
the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger 3
compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle
when taken from its mounting. Do not store in the
vehicle.
Rear Cargo Cover

Cargo Tie-Down Hooks

WARNING!
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should be
used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is moving. • To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, a hook could pull loose and allow the child
seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured.
Use only the anchors provided for child seat
tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve-
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks hicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
(Continued)
Cargo Load Floor

• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits The panel in the load floor is reversible for added utility.
described on the label attached to the left door or One side is carpeted and the other side features a plastic
left door center pillar. lined tray which holds a variety of items.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put 3
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
rear of the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
Cargo Load Floor
The cargo load floor is held by spring loaded latches. In REAR WINDOW FEATURES
order to use the cargo load floor, use the following
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
procedure:
A switch on the right side of the steering column controls
NOTE: The cargo load floor latches should not be operation of the rear wiper/washer function. Rotating
used as cargo tie-downs. the center of the switch forward to the on position will
activate the wiper. The rear wiper operates in an inter-
1. Flip up pull loop(s) so they are perpendicular (straight
mittent mode only. Rotating the center of the switch all
up) to the top surface of the tray.
the way forward will turn on the wash function. The
2. Pull up on loop(s) and twist 90 degrees, so they are wash pump will continue to operate as long as the button
parallel to the slotted hole in tray. is pressed. Upon release, the wipers will cycle two times
before returning to the set position.
3. Lift the tray over the loop(s), and reposition the tray.
4. Pull up on the loop(s) and twist 90 degrees, so they are
perpendicular (straight up) to the slotted hole in tray.
5. Push the loop(s) back down, so they are parallel to the
top of the tray.
If the liftgate flipper glass is open, connection to the rear

window wiper is interrupted preventing activation of the
rear wiper blade. When the liftgate flipper glass is closed,
the rear wiper switch, or the ignition switch, needs to be
turned OFF and ON to restart the rear wiper.
Rear Window Defroster
3
Press this button (located on the Climate Control
panel) to turn on the rear window defroster and
the heated side mirrors (if equipped). An LED in the
button will illuminate to indicate the rear window de-
froster is on. The defroster automatically turns off after
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch about 10 minutes of operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “Park”
position if power accessory delay is active. Power acces-
sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door; if this
happens, the rear wiper will stop at its current position
and will not go to “Park”.
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.

CAUTION!
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
• To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
interior surface of the window.
The optional crossbars must be installed using the correct
• Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm orientation (the longer crossbar toward the front).
water.
The optional crossbars must also be secured in one of the
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED seven detent positions marked with an arrow on the
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the siderails to prevent movement. To move the crossbars,
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The loosen the thumb screws located at the upper edge of
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be each crossbar approximately eight turns, then move the
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars. crossbar to the desired position, keeping the crossbars
parallel to the rack frame. Once the crossbar is in one of
NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized the seven detent positions, retighten the thumb screws to
dealer can order and install Mopar威 crossbars built lock the crossbar into position.
specifically for this roof rack system.
NOTE:
CAUTION!
• To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not
in use, place the front crossbar in the second detent • To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
from the front of the vehicle and the rear crossbar in NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without
the last detent closest to the rear of the vehicle. crossbars installed. The load should be secured
• If the rear crossbar (or any metallic object) is placed
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on 3
the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the
over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may
roof, place a blanket or some other protection
experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For
between the load and the roof surface.
improved satellite radio reception, place the rear cross-
bar in the second detent from the rear of the vehicle • To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
when not in use. not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
• The grab handles on the back of the vehicle (if evenly as possible and secure the load appropri-
equipped) are not to be used as a towing feature. ately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with
large frontal area should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING!

• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care- Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to sonal injury or property damage. Follow the Roof
a load. This is especially true on large flat loads Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
and may result in damage to the cargo or your rack.
vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 ▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
4
䡵 Instrument Cluster – Gasoline Engine . . . . . . . 182 ▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
䡵 Instrument Cluster – Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
䡵 Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
䡵 Sales Code REQ — AM/FM Stereo Radio And
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 193
6–Disc CD/DVD Changer (MP3/WMA AUX
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . 208
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . 198
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 216
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . 218 ▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD

And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
▫ List Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . 220 ▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA ▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 234
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
䡵 Sales Code RES/RSC — AM/FM Stereo Radio
䡵 AM/FM/CD/DVD Radio (RER/REN) – If With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And Sirius
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition ▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 235
System (VR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
▫ Operating Instructions — uconnect威 phone And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 245
䡵 Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 246
CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 226
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
䡵 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) — If ▫ Selecting uconnect威 studios (Satellite)

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
▫ Connecting The iPod威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 ▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 ▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Using Radio ▫ Operating Instructions - uconnect威 studios
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 (Satellite) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 4
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 ▫ Operating Instructions - uconnect威 phone
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
䡵 uconnect studios威 (Sirius Backseat TV™) —
䡵 uconnect威 studios (Satellite Radio) — If
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Equipped (REN/REQ/RER/RES
Radios Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 䡵 Video Entertainment System™ (Sales Code
XRV) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls —
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Identification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . 253
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control — If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
䡵 CD/DVD Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 260
▫ Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
▫ Manual Air Conditioning And Heating
System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 - Air Outlet 5 - Upper Switch Bank 9 - Lower Switch Bank

2 - Instrument Cluster 6 - Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter 10 - Climate Controls
3 - Radio 7 - Storage Bin 11 - Ignition Switch
4 - Glove Compartment 8 - Power Outlet 12 - Storage Bin
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – GASOLINE ENGINE

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – DIESEL ENGINE
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during
1. Speedometer
each stop.
Indicates vehicle speed.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
2. Brake Warning Light
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
This light monitors various brake functions,
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
including brake fluid level and parking brake
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
dropped below a specified level.
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the the brake fluid level checked.
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) sys-
sary.
tem. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is

WARNING!
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately. 3. Turn Signal Indicator
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System when the turn signal lever is operated. A tone will 4
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force chime if the turn signals are left on for more than one
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the mile (2 km).
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
4. High Beam Indicator
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the 5. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi- The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
by an authorized dealer.
the ON position before engine start. If the bulb does not during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as
condition checked promptly. possible.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap, 7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In switch is turned to the ON position and may
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will stay on for as long as four seconds.
not require towing.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
The MIL flashes to alert you to serious conditions that indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic is not functioning and that service is required. However,
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as the conventional brake system will continue to operate
soon as possible if this occurs. normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
6. Airbag Warning Light If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
This light turns on and remains on for six to as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
8. Tachometer Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.

Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
(RPM). The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
9. Vehicle Security Light 11. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately / Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed tion, apply as little throttle as possible. While 4
continuously after the alarm is set. The security driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your
light will also come on for about three seconds when the speed and driving to the prevailing road con-
ignition is first turned on. ditions, and do not switch off the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP), or Traction Control System (TCS).
10. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The 12. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
light should turn on momentarily when the engine Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the should be checked monthly, when cold and
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
on. placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
tires.) low tire pressure telltale.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as approximately one minute and then remain continuously
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the 13. Temperature Gauge
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
to continue to function properly. ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
CAUTION!
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
The TPMS has been optimized for the original ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to 4
warning have been established for the tire size exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re- CAUTION!
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately, and call an autho-
rized dealership for service.
15. TOW/HAUL Indicator Light — If Equipped

WARNING!
This light will illuminate when the TOW/
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or HAUL button has been selected. The TOW/
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling HAUL button is located in the center of the
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer- instrument panel (below the climate controls).
ship for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
16. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
decide to look under the hood yourself, see Section 7
/ Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light
of this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cool-
The malfunction lamp for the Electronic Stabil-
ing System Pressure Cap paragraph.
ity Program (ESP) is combined with Brake
Assist System (BAS). The yellow “ESP/BAS
14. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Warning Lamp” comes on when the ignition
Display
switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should go
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine running,
messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the
ter” later in this section.
BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
17. 4WD LOW Indicator — If Equipped 19. Cruise Indicator

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in This indicator lights when the speed control
the 4WD LOW mode. The front and rear drive- system is turned ON.
shafts are mechanically locked together forcing
20. Odometer
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
speed.
been driven.
18. Seat Belt Reminder Light 4
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. There-
check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat
fore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
check or when driving, if the driver or front passenger
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Indicator Light
be determined.
will flash or remain on continuously. Refer to ⬙Occupant
Restraints/Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System 21. Shift Lever Indicator
(BeltAlert威)⬙ in Section 2 for more information. This display indicator shows the automatic transmission
shift lever selection.
NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
PARK. come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
22. Fuel Gauge
during starting, have the system checked by an autho-
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
rized dealer.
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
24. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
23. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light shows the front fog lights are ON.
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected the light will come on 25. Charging System Light
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the ing system. The light should come on when the
shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
running your vehicle will usually be drivable, however, driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
If the light is flashing when the engine is running, the charging system light remains on, it means that the
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho- (EVIC)
rized dealer. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
26. Low Fuel Light
instrument cluster.
This light will turn on, and a single chime will
sound, when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank. The
Low Fuel Warning Light may turn on and off again, 4
especially during and after hard braking, accelerations,
or turns. This occurs due to the shifting of the fuel in the
tank.
27. Glow Plug Indicator Light — Diesel Only
This light will illuminate when the ignition
switch is first turned to the ON position. Wait
until the light turns off before starting the
vehicle. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in Sec-
tion 5 of this manual.
The EVIC consists of the following:
• System Status
• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays FUNCTION SELECT Button

Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to select
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
the displayed function YES (Y) or NO (N).
• Compass Display
• Outside Temperature Display
SCROLL Button
• Trip Computer Functions Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip
Functions, Personal Settings (Customer Pro-
The system allows the driver to select information by
grammable Features), and System Status Mes-
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
sages.
wheel:
COMPASS/TEMPERATURE Button
MENU Button
Press and release the COMPASS/
Press and release the MENU button and the
TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight
mode displayed will change between Trip
compass readings and the outside temperature.
Functions, Personal Settings, and System Sta-
tus.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) • PROGRAMMING ACTIVE — NEW KEY PRO-
Displays GRAMMED
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
• SERVICE SECURITY KEY
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages: • DRIVER/PASSENGER DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
• TURN SIGNAL ON • LEFT/RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
• PERFORM SERVICE • X DOORS OPEN (with graphic) 4
• DAMAGED KEY — KEY DOES NOT COMMUNI- • LIFTGATE OPEN (with graphic)
CATE
• LIFTGATE/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
• KEY NOT PROGRAMMED — KEY NOT PRO-
• LIFTGATE/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)
GRAMMED
• LIFTGLASS OPEN (with graphic)
• WRONG KEY — KEY DOES NOT BELONG TO
VEHICLE • HOOD OPEN (with graphic)
• KEY NOT PROGRAMMED — EXCEEDED KEY PRO- • HOOD/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
GRAM LIMIT
• HOOD/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)
• LIFTGATE/HOOD OPEN (with graphic) • AUTO HIGH BEAMS ON

• HOOD/GLASS/DOOR OPEN (with graphic) • AUTO HIGH BEAMS OFF
• HOOD/GLASS/DOORS OPEN (with graphic) • PARK ASSIST DISABLED
• HOOD/GATE/DOOR OPEN (with graphic) • SERVICE SUSPENSION
• HOOD/GATE/DOORS OPEN (with graphic) • SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
• LIFTGLASS/DOOR OPEN (with graphic) • TRANSMISSION OVER TEMP
• LIFTGLASS/DOORS OPEN (with graphic) • CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURE
• LIFTGLASS/HOOD OPEN (with graphic) • SERVICE 4WD SYSTEM
• WASHER FLUID LOW (with graphic) • 4WD SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL
• COOLANT LOW (with graphic) • LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
• OIL CHANGE REQUIRED • WARNING! LIMIT SPEED
• OIL CHANGE RESET • CHECK GASCAP
• CHECK GAUGES • ESP OFF
• IOD FUSE OUT • LEFT FRONT LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM Sys-
tem Only)
• HILL DESCENT CONTROL
• RIGHT FRONT LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM Sys-
• MEMORY #1 POSITIONS SET
tem Only)
• MEMORY #2 POSITIONS SET
• LEFT REAR LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM System
• MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED — SEATBELT BUCK- Only)
LED (with graphic) 4
• RIGHT REAR LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM Sys-
• MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED — VEHICLE NOT IN tem Only)
PARK
• SPARE LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM System
• DRIVER 1 MEMORY Only)
• DRIVER 2 MEMORY • WATER IN FUEL (Diesel Models Only)
• ADJ. PEDALS DISABLED — CRUISE CONTROL SET • SERVICE EXHAUST (Diesel Models Only)
• ADJ. PEDALS DISABLED — SHIFTER IN REVERSE • RKE BATTERY LOW
• LOW TIRE PRESSURE • VEHICLE NOT IN PARK
• CHECK TPM SYSTEM • IGNITION POSITION
• PRESS BRAKE TO START release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indica-
tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
• INSERT KEY
refer to the following procedure.
• TURN TO ON
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
Engine Oil Change Indicator System start the engine).
Oil Change Required (Gasoline Engines Only) 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change within 10 seconds.
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec-
onds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
Trip Functions
upon your personal driving style.
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
• Average Fuel Economy
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
• Distance To Empty
• Trip A Distance To Empty (DTE)

Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
• Trip B
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
• Elapsed Time determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
• Service Distance
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION
• Display Units of Measure In SELECT button.
4
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
Computer functions. loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
tion: When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
Average Fuel Economy
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
Trip A button once to clear the resettable function being dis-

Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last played. To reset all resettable functions, press and hold
reset. the FUNCTION SELECT button for two seconds. Current
display will reset along with other functions
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last Compass Display
reset. The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
Elapsed Time
COMPASS/TEMPERATURE button to display
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
one of eight compass readings and the outside
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
temperature.
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position. Automatic Compass Calibration
When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic
Display Units of Measure In
and the EVIC will display “CAL” until the compass is
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
calibrated. To complete the calibration process, drive
TION SELECT button until “US” or “METRIC” appears.
slowly (5 mph/ 8 km/h) in one or more complete circles
To Reset The Display in an area, free from magnetic material until the CAL
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The Compass
displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT will now function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration Compass Variance

If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” indicator Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows: country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
1. Turn on the ignition switch.
readings. For the most accurate compass performance,
2. Press the MENU button until Personal Settings (Cus- the compass variance must be set using the following
tomer Programmable Features) menu is reached. procedure: 4
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass” is NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
displayed in the EVIC. the Overhead console. This is where the compass sensor
is located.
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to
start the calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be dis-
played in the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
indicator turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to

change the variance number. Continue until desired
number is reached.
5. Press either MENU, SCROLL, or COMPASS/TEMP
button to set the value and exit.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until “Personal
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
2. Press the MENU button until Personal Settings
choices:
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached.
Language
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance” is
When in this display you may select one of three lan-
displayed in the EVIC.
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the uconnect威 gps (if equipped). Press the
FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to opened. To make your selection, press and release the
select English, Espanol, or Francais. Then, as you con- FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N)
tinue, the information will display in the selected lan- appears.
guage.
Remote Key Unlock
NOTE: The EVIC will not change the uconnect威 lan- When “Driver Door 1st Press” is selected, only the
guage selection. Please refer to “Language Selection” in driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
the uconnect威 phone section of this manual for details. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When 4
“Driver Door 1st Press” is selected, you must press the
Auto Door Locks
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
When YES (Y) is selected, all of the doors will lock
passenger’s doors. When “All Doors 1st Press” is se-
automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
lected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the
15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, press and
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selec-
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or
tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
NO (N) appears.
until “Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press”
Auto Unlock On Exit appears.
When YES (Y) is selected, all of the doors will unlock
Sound Horn with Lock
when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
When YES (Y) is selected, a short horn sound will occur
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This
feature may be selected with or without the “Flash Automatic High Beams (Available with SmartBeam
Lamps with Lock” feature. To make your selection, press Only)
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
or NO (N) appears. will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
Flash Lamps with Lock
SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears. Refer to
When YES (Y) is selected, the front and rear turn signals
“Lights/SmartBeams — If Equipped” in Section 3 of this
will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
manual for more information.
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the “Sound Horn with Lock” feature. To make Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE- Headlights Only)
LECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears. When YES (Y) is selected, and the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-
Headlamp Off Delay
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,”
button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.
“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime Reset Service Distance (Displays Only if Service
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the Interval was Changed)
brightness, refer to “Lights” in Section 3 of this manual. When this feature is selected, the current accumulated
service distance can be reset to the newly selected service
Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers — If Equipped
interval. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT but-
When YES (Y) is selected, the system will automatically
ton until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on
the windshield. To make your selection, press and release Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat 4
the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) Only)
appears. When NO (N) is selected, the system reverts to This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
the standard intermittent wiper operation. enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
Service Interval
FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N)
Diesel Models — If Equipped appears.
When this feature is selected, a service interval between
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
2,500 to 12,500 miles (4 000 to 20 000 km) in 625 miles
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
(1 000 km) increments may be selected. To make your
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button to select distances between 2,500 to 12,500 miles (4
000 to 20 000 km) in 625 miles (1 000 km) increments.
door. Refer to “Easy Entry/Exit Seat” under “Driver Hill Start Assist
Memory Seat” in Section 3 of this manual for more To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
information. TION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.
Key Off Power Delay Display Units of Measure In:
When this feature is selected, the power window The EVIC, odometer, and uconnect威 gps (if equipped)
switches, radio, uconnect威 phone (if equipped), DVD can be changed between English and Metric units of
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), measure. To make your selection, press and release the
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes FUNCTION SELECT button until “US” or “METRIC”
after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening a vehicle appears.
door will cancel this feature. To make your selection,
System Status
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
“Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” or “10 min.” appears. Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following System Status messages displays in the EVIC:
Illuminated Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate • System OK
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
• System Warnings Displayed (will display all currently
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-
active System Warnings.)
tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
• Tire Pressure Monitor System (shows the current pres- NOTE:

sure of all four road tires.) For additional information, • Tires heat up during normal driving conditions. Heat
refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor System” in Section 5 of will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi
this manual. (14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions. Refer
to “Tires-General Information/Tire Inflation Pres-
sures” in Section 5 for additional information.
• Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI, 4
kPa, or BAR.
Tire Pressure Display

SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIO Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
JACK)
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
side of the radio faceplate.
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
REQ Radio Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio Phone Button uconnect威 phone — If Equipped
will remain tuned to the new station until you make Press this button to operate the uconnect威 phone feature
another selection. Holding either button will bypass (if equipped). Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
stations without stopping until you release it.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
SCAN Button available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if 4
TIME Button
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
and frequency display.
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Clock Setting Procedure
Voice Recognition Button uconnect威 phone — If
Equipped 1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
Press this button to operate the uconnect威 phone feature
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ TUNE Control
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
knob to save the time change. to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds. Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
step 2. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
INFO Button
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
mid-range tones.
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
treble tones.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies. time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
sound level from the right or left side speakers. format types:
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time 16-Digit Character
Program Type
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control Display
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between No program type or un-
None
the front and rear speakers. defined
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to 4
Classical Classicl
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
Classic Rock Cls Rock
MUSIC TYPE Button College College
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type Country Country
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
Foreign Language Language
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se- Information Inform
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Jazz Jazz
Music Type information. News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
16-Digit Character station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Program Type Music Type function only operates when in the FM
Display
Personality Persnlty mode.
Public Public If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
Rhythm and Blues R&B (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
Religious Music Rel Musc exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
Religious Talk Rel Talk SETUP Button
Rock Rock Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
Soft Soft the following items:
Soft Rock Soft Rck NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R & B through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
Sports Sports select an entry and make changes.
Talk Talk
• DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
Top 40 Top 40 selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
Weather Weather highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon up and down the menu (if equipped).
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
• DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between NOTE:

playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by • The available selections for each of the above entries
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped). varies depending upon the disc.
• These selections can only be made while playing a
• DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
DVD.
will display the following:
• VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and
• Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch 4
OFF (if equipped).
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (if equipped). • VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if
equipped).
• Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on • VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the
the disc) (if equipped). mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
• Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if • Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
equipped). you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes. down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
changes. to select the number and then push to select.
• Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the Subtitle Language — If Equipped
user to scroll through the following items and set Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
defaults according to customer preference. language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
Menu Language — If Equipped
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
to select the number and then push to select.
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙ Subtitles — If Equipped
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/ Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the Off or On.
number and then push to select.
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Audio Language — If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under
language (effective only if the language is supported by this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory

Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide When you are receiving a station that you wish to
screen, pan scan, and letter box. commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
and press and release that button. If a button is not
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not 4
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
stored into pushbutton memory.
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
customer-preferred settings.
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
AM and FM Buttons pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode. memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding

CAUTION!
button number will display.
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
Buttons 1 - 6
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
DISC Button components.
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes. NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO) LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
geographic region. These region codes must match in corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their ⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
reading the disc.
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
CAUTION!
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only. previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK 4
player mechanism. button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD currently playing.
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio TIME Button (CD MODE)
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is Press this button to change the display from a large CD
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc. playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
RW/FF (CD MODE) Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)

Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button When reading discs recorded using formats other than
works in a similar manner. ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable • Maximum number of directory levels: 8
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
• Maximum number of files: 255
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions. • Maximum number of folders: 100
Supported Media (Disc Types) • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
character extension)
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. frequencies in the following table are supported. In
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/ majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession MPEG Sampling
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/ Bit Rate (kbps)
Specification Frequency (kHz)
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times. 320, 256, 224,
MPEG-1 Audio 192, 160, 128, 4
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and 48, 44.1, 32
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/ Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
WMA tracks on that disc.
160, 128, 144,
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16 112, 96, 80, 64,
Layer 3
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA 56, 48
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play- WMA Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file Specification Frequency (kHz)
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file. 48, 64, 96, 128,
WMA 44.1 and 48
160, 192 VBR
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Number of files and folders - Loading times will
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not increase with more files and folders
supported by the radios.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
supported. single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded, LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files. turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
affected by the following:
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than playable files).
CD-R media
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play) Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
time⬙ priority mode. AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down. 4
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and radio will display song titles for each file. SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display. SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an No function.
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) Operating Instructions - uconnect威 studios

Press the TIME button to change the display from (Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will Refer to “uconnect威 studios (Satellite Radio)” in this
display for five seconds. section.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode) Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
No function. System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Guide.”
No function.
Dolby威
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
Manufactured under license from Dolby威 Laboratories.
System (VR) (If Equipped)
⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Dolby威 Laboratories.
Section 3.
Macrovision
For uconnect威 “Voice Recognition System (VR),” refer to
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
“uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
Operating Instructions - uconnect威 phone (If tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
Equipped) technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, Refer to your uconnect威 tunes (REN) or (RER) user’s
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse manual for detailed operating instructions.
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
DTS™ System (VR) — If Equipped
⬙DTS™⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital The- For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
ater Systems, Inc. Section 3.
AM/FM/CD/DVD RADIO (RER/REN) – IF Operating Instructions — uconnect姞 phone — If 4

EQUIPPED Equipped
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate. Clock Setting Procedure
The REN and RER radios contain a CD/DVD player, USB uconnect威 gps — RER only
port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD). Sirius Satellite The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
for easy menu selection. satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and
(GPS)-based Navigation system. daylight savings information is set.
To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN 6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
1. Turn on the radio.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed. The daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen. current setting:
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the 1. Turn on the radio.
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed. 3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
played to change the current setting.
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
Show Time if Radio is Off Changing the Time Zone

When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
as follows to change the current setting: 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on 4
the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right position to operate the radio.
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
RES Radio
SEEK Buttons 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch knob to save time change.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass RW/FF
stations without stopping, until you release it. Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the 4
TIME Button
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
AM or FM frequencies.
and frequency display.
TUNE Control
Clock Setting Procedure
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
SCROLL control knob. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
mid-range tones.
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
treble tones.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the this station and press and release that button. If a button
sound level from the right or left side speakers. is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
the front and rear speakers. repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. MP3 Audio Play
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
NOTE:
pressing the pushbutton twice.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
Buttons 1 - 6 recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact 4
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
stations).
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
DISC Button Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
AM/FM modes to Disc modes. the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
CAUTION! 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
CD player mechanism.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert SEEK Button
a second CD if one is already loaded. Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
can cause damage to the player. previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
CD and MP3 modes. Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
TIME Button
change of pace.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track. 4
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or Play.
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
button works in a similar manner.
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
AM/FM Button file recording media and formats are limited. When
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode. writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. display.)
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor- • Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. character extension)
The radio uses the following limits for file systems: • Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
• Maximum number of files: 255
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
display the file name and folder name, and will assign multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats MPEG Sampling

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten- Bit Rate (kbps)
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 160, 128, 144,
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is MPEG-2 Audio 112, 96, 80, 64,
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will 24, 22.05, 16
Layer 3 56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
not play the file. 16, 8
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title 4
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit supported by the radios.
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
supported.
VBR bit rate.
MPEG Sampling Playback of MP3 Files
Bit Rate (kbps) When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
320, 256, 224, radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
MPEG-1 Audio 192, 160, 128, contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
48, 44.1, 32 time to start playing the MP3 files.
Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
by the following: audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
increase with more files and folders
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
SALES CODE RES/RSC — AM/FM STEREO Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND
SIRIUS RADIO
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio. 4
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
SEEK Buttons
RES/RSC Radio Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
will remain tuned to the new station until you make available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
another selection. Holding either button will bypass uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
stations without stopping until you release it.
TIME Button
Voice Recognition System (Radio) — If Equipped Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
Refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in Section 3. and frequency display.
Voice Recognition Button uconnect威 phone — If Clock Setting Procedure
Equipped
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
Press this button to operate the uconnect威 phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3. 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
uconnect” message will display on the radio screen. SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
Phone Button uconnect威 phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the uconnect威 phone feature 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3. SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds. TUNE Control

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones. 4
procedure, starting at Step 2.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
INFO Button time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text mid-range tones.
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
RW/FF time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the treble tones.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
AM or FM frequencies.
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
sound level from the right or left side speakers. format types:
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time 16-Digit Character
Program Type
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control Display
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between No program type or un-
None
the front and rear speakers. defined
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Classical Classicl
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
Classic Rock Cls Rock
MUSIC TYPE Button College College
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type Country Country
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
Foreign Language Language
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se- Information Inform
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Jazz Jazz
Music Type information. News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
16-Digit Character By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
Program Type is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
Display
Personality Persnlty station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
Public Public
mode.
Rhythm and Blues R&B
Religious Music Rel Musc If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
Religious Talk Rel Talk (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be 4
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
Rock Rock
Soft Soft SETUP Button
Soft Rock Soft Rck Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B the following items:
Sports Sports • Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
Talk Talk you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Top 40 Top 40 knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
Weather Weather TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
AM/FM Button and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
When you are receiving a station that you wish to button number will display.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
Buttons 1 - 6
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
this station and press and release that button. If a button
stations).
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but DISC/AUX Button
will not be stored into pushbutton memory. Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
MP3 Audio Play ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
NOTE:
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), CAUTION!
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact 4
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
CD player mechanism.
Inserting Compact Disc(s) • Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD away and jam the player mechanism.
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into • RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the a second CD if one is already loaded.
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than • Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
ejected before a new disc can be loaded. can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD. button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it. RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped). works in a similar manner.
SEEK Button AM/FM Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button) Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting When reading discs recorded using formats other than
change of pace. ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
domly selected track. 4
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play. • Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Notes On Playing MP3 Files • Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
file recording media and formats are limited. When
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
tions.
display the file name and folder name and will assign
Supported Media (Disc Types) a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With Supported MP3 File Formats
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
display.) sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension) following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
VBR bit rates.
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after MPEG Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of Specification Frequency (kHz)
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in 320, 256, 224,
longer disc loading times. MPEG-1 Audio 192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG Sampling Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
Bit Rate (kbps) by the following:
160, 128, 144, • Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
MPEG-2 Audio 112, 96, 80, 64, CD-R media
24, 22.05, 16
Layer 3 56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8 • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title 4
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not • Number of files and folders - Loading times will
supported by the radios. increase with more files and folders
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
supported. to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
time to start playing the MP3 files. on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
playable files). allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) vehicle speakers.
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
time⬙ priority mode.
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
more and the radio will display song titles for each file. down.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display. Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Operating Instructions - uconnect威 phone (If This feature allows you to plug an iPod威 into the
Equipped) vehicle’s sound system through a 16–pin connector using
Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3. the provided interface cable.
Operating Instructions - uconnect威 studios UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威 and
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped) iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may not
Refer to “uconnect威 studios (Satellite Radio)” in this fully support the UCI features. Please visit Apple’s
section. website for software updates. 4
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) — IF NOTE:
EQUIPPED • If the radio has a USB port, connecting an iPod威 to this
port does not play the media. For playing an iPod威,
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/ use the separate 16–pin connector port (in the glove
REL/RET radios only with uconnect威. For sales code compartment on some vehicles).
RER, REN, REP, REW or REZ touch-screen radio UCI
feature, refer to the separate RER, REN or REZ User’s • Connecting an iPod威 to the AUX port located in the
Manual. UCI is available only if equipped as an option radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCI
with these radios. feature to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPod姞 Using This Feature

Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod威 to By using the optional connection cable to connect an
the vehicle’s 16–pin connector port (which is located in iPod威 to the vehicle’s UCI 16–pin connector port:
the glove compartment on some vehicles). Once the
• The iPod威 audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound
iPod威 is connected and synchronized to the vehicle’s UCI
system, providing metadata (Artist, track title, album,
system (iPod威 may take a few seconds to connect), the
etc.) information on the radio display.
iPod威 starts charging and is ready for use by pressing
radio switches, as described below. • The iPod威 can be controlled using the radio buttons to
Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
NOTE:
• You may have to remove the connector pin protection • The iPod威 battery charges when plugged into the UCI
cap from the 16–pin connector port, prior to connect- connector.
ing the cable.
Controlling The iPod姞 Using Radio Buttons
• If the iPod威 battery is completely discharged, it may To get into the UCI (iPod威) mode and access a connected
not communicate with the UCI system until a mini- iPod威, press the ‘AUX’ button on the radio faceplate.
mum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod威 connected Once in the UCI (iPod威) mode, iPod威 audio tracks (if
to the UCI system may charge it to the required level. available from iPod威) start playing over the vehicle’s
audio system.
Play Mode • Jump backward in the current track by pressing and

When switched to UCI mode, the iPod威 automatically holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
starts Play mode. In Play mode, you may use the button long enough will take you to the beginning
following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the of the current track.
iPod威 and display data:
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or holding the FF >> button.
previous track. 4
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while jump backward or forward respectively, for five
playing a track, skips to the next track. seconds.
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one • Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
click, during the first two seconds of the track, will previous or next track. If the << SEEK button is
jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this pressed during the first two seconds of the track, it will
button at any other time in the track, will jump to jump to the previous track in the list, if you press this
the beginning of the current track. button at any other time in the track it will jump to the
beginning of the track. If you press the SEEK >>
button during play mode, it will jump to the next track
in the list.
• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威. If the RND icon is
the associated metadata (Artist, track title, album, etc.) showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps ON.
to the next screen of data for that track. Once you have
List Or Browse Mode
seen all screens, the last INFO button press will take
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
you back to the play mode screen on the radio.
below, takes you to List mode. List mode enables you to
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod威 scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod威.
mode to repeat the current playing track.
• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod威 scan mode, which in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod威.
will play the first five seconds of each track in the
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclock-
current list and then forward to the next song. To stop
wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when
the track detail on the radio display. Once you have
it is playing the track, press the SCAN button again.
the track to be played highlighted on the radio
During Scan mode you can also press the << SEEK
display, press the TUNE control knob to select and
and SEEK >> buttons to select the previous and next
start playing the track. Turning the TUNE control
tracks.
knob fast will scroll through the list faster. During
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only): fast scroll, you may notice a slight delay in updating
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and the information on the radio display.
• During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in • To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the same PRESET button again to go back to Play
bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards mode.
(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
• In List mode, the radio PRESET Buttons are used as level menu of the iPod威. Turn the TUNE control knob
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威. to list the top-menu item you wish to select and press
the TUNE control knob. This will display the next 4
• Preset 1 – Playlists
sub-menu list item on the iPod威 then you can follow
• Preset 2 – Artists the same steps to go to the desired track in that list.
Not all iPod威 sub-menu levels are available on this
• Preset 3 – Albums
system.
• Preset 4 – Genres
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
• Preset 5 - Audiobooks another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
iPod威.
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
• Pressing a PRESET button, will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
uconnect姞 studios (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF

CAUTION!
EQUIPPED (REN/REQ/RER/RES RADIOS ONLY)
• Leaving the iPod威 (or any supported device) any- Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
alter the operation, or damage the device. Follow coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
the device manufacturer’s guidelines. Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
• Placing items on the iPod威, or connections to the sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
iPod威 in the vehicle, can cause damage to the dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
device and/or to the connectors. NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
WARNING! System Activation
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 while driving. Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
Failure to following this warning could result in an may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
accident. service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account at no addi-
tional charge. For further information, call the toll-free
number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Cana- display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
dian residents. the radio to exit this screen.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios
Number (ESN/SID) While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
Please have the following information available when faceplate.
calling: 4
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
Number (ESN/SID).
Selecting uconnect姞 studios (Satellite) Mode
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number. Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
mode.
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
Satellite Antenna
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
using the Tune/Scroll control knob until Sirius ID is
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
selected. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob and the
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within Operating Instructions - uconnect姞 studios
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly (Satellite) Mode
on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality position to operate the radio.
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
SEEK Buttons
following reasons:
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
structure or under a physical obstacle. up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
form of short audio mutes.
without stopping until you release it.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
SCAN Button
cause intermittent reception.
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
cause signal blockage. tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button MUSIC TYPE Button

Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa- Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail- mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an or turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within five
additional three seconds will make the radio display the seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return lected.
to normal display).
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music 4
RW/FF type.
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
direction of the arrows.
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
following items: the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
Sirius subscription.
twice.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Buttons 1 - 6
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
and press and release that button. If a button is not commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
Operating Instructions - uconnect姞 phone (If
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
Equipped)
stored into pushbutton memory.
uconnect studios姞 (SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV™) — powered remote control, and two headsets. Refer to your
IF EQUIPPED VES™ User’s Manual for detailed operating instructions.
Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting
The LCD screen is located on the headliner behind the
technology to provide streaming video. The subscription
front seats.
service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio. SIRIUS Back-
seat TV™ offers three video channels for family enter-
tainment, directly from its satellites and broadcasting
studios. 4
NOTE: SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii and
has limited coverage in Alaska.
Refer to your Video Entertainment System (VES)™, RER
Navigation or REN Multimedia User Manuals for de-
tailed operating instructions.
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM™ (SALES

CODE XRV) — IF EQUIPPED
The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) con- Lowering the Display Screen
sists of a LCD (liquid crystal display) screen, a battery-
Remote Control Location Remote Sound System Controls (Back View of Steering
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF Wheel)
EQUIPPED The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
access the switches. switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch CD Player
between the various modes available (AM/FM/TAPE/ Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
CD, Etc.). track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
after the current track begins to play.
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the 4
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
each mode.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
Radio Operation
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
center button will select the next available CD in the
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
player.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
CD/DVD MAINTENANCE NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-

To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e. scratched, reflective
precautions: coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
wiping from center to edge. Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc. by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
or antistatic sprays. does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing. turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System —
If Equipped
The controls for the heating/air conditioning and venti-
lation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary
knobs. These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired
interior conditions. 4
Manual Air Conditioning And Heating Controls

The instrument panel features four dual-vane airflow
registers. Two registers are located on the outer ends of
the instrument panel and two are located in the center of
the instrument panel. These registers can be closed to
partially block airflow, and they can be adjusted to direct
airflow where the occupant desires.
Blower Control Temperature Control

The blower control rotary knob (on the The temperature control rotary knob
left) controls the blower and can be set (in the center) controls the air tem-
to one of four speeds, and OFF. The perature. The coldest temperature set-
blower fan motor will remain on un- ting is on the extreme left and the
til the system is turned to the OFF warmest setting on the extreme right
position or the ignition is turned of the rotation. The knob can be posi-
OFF. tioned at any point on the dial.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the Mode Control
climate controls will not function during Remote Start The mode control rotary knob (on the
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off) right) can be placed in several posi-
position. tions. Dots between each of the mode
selections identify intermediate modes
that allow the occupants to fine tune
airflow distribution.
Defrost through vents under the front seats. Some airflow is

Air is directed to the windshield through the delivered to defrost while in the floor mode so that
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also comfort can be maintained.
directed to the front door windows through the side
Bi-Level
window demister grilles. Some airflow is delivered to the
Air flows both through the outlets located in the
floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained.
instrument panel and those located on the floor. Air
Defrost/Floor flows through the registers in the back of the center 4
Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets console, and under the front seats to the rear seat
and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is passengers. These registers can be closed to partially
also directed to the front door windows through the block airflow. The center console outlets deliver condi-
side window demister grilles. Some airflow is delivered tioned air while the floor outlets deliver heated air.
to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be
Panel
maintained.
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
Floor ment panel. Air flows through the registers in the
Air flows through the floor outlets located under back of the center console to the rear seat passengers.
the instrument panel and into the rear seating area These registers can be closed to block airflow.
Recirculation Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed

The recirculation feature can be selected with when the air conditioning compressor is on. This is a
the mode control knob. You may choose be- normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and
tween Bi-Level Recirculation and Panel Recir- off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy.
culation air outlets while in this mode. Nor-
Automatic Temperature Control — If Equipped
mally, air enters from outside the vehicle. However, when
The Automatic Temperature Control System automati-
in “Recirculation” mode air inside the vehicle is re-used.
cally maintains the interior comfort level desired by the
Use this mode to rapidly cool the inside of the vehicle.
driver and passenger.
The “Recirculation” mode can also be used to tempo-
rarily block out outside odors, smoke, and dust.
Air Conditioning
To turn on the Air Conditioning, set the fan control
at any speed and press the snowflake button
located on the control panel. Conditioned air will
be directed through the outlets selected by the mode
control. A light in the snowflake button shows that the air
conditioning is on.
be used for front seat occupants only. The HI AUTO

position should be used when more airflow is desired, or
when rear seat occupants are present. Dial in the comfort
setting you would like the system to maintain by rotating
the driver’s or passenger’s control knob. Once the com-
fort level is selected, the system will maintain that level
automatically using the heating system. Should the de-
sired comfort level require air conditioning, the system 4
will automatically make the adjustment.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
Automatic Temperature Controls the OFF (O) position on the blower control knob stops the
system completely.
NOTE: The numbers on the temperature dial represent
a comfort setting when the Mode knob is set to AUTO, NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any
and not the actual air temperature. time without affecting automatic control operation. How-
ever, if the driver and/or passenger temperature knobs
Turn the mode control (on the right) knob to AUTO, and
are set to the full hot or full cold positions, the air
then turn the blower control (on the left) knob to either
temperature out of the ducts will be full hot or full cold
LO AUTO or HI AUTO. The LO AUTO position should
respectively. With the temperature setting in these posi- NOTE:

tions, the system does not attempt automatic comfort • The surface of the climate control panel, and the top
control. center of the instrument panel should be kept free of
debris due to the climate control sensor’s location.
Air Conditioning
Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation
The air conditioning in this system is automatic.
of this system.
Pressing this button while in AUTO mode will
cause the LED to flash three times and remain off. • To provide you with maximum comfort in the auto-
This indicates that the system is in AUTO and requesting matic mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will
the air conditioning is not necessary. remain off until the engine warms up. However, the
fan will engage immediately if the defrost mode is
Recirculation
selected or if you manually select a blower speed.
The system will automatically control recircu-
lation. However, pressing this button will tem- • Under certain conditions (after the vehicle is turned
porarily put the system in “Recirculation” off) the climate control system may recalibrate and a
mode. This can be used when outside condi- noise may be heard for 20 seconds. This is part of
tions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are normal operation.
present. This will cause the LED to illuminate.
• Most of the time, when in Automatic operation, you Manual Operation

can temporarily put the system into Recirculation This system offers a full complement of manual override
mode by pressing the “Recirculation” button. How- features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
ever, under certain conditions in automatic the system Mode Preferred Automatic with Manual Air Temperature
is blowing air out of the defrost vents. When these Control, and Manual. This means the customer can
conditions are present, and the “Recirculation” button override the blower, mode, and disable the Automatic
is pressed, the indicator will flash and remain off. This Temperature Control completely.
tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation 4
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
mode at this time. If you would like to go to Recircu-
Operation Chart below for details.
lation mode, you must first move your mode knob to
Panel, Panel/Floor, or Floor, then press the “Recircu-
lation” button. This feature will reduce the possibility
of window fogging.
NOTE: Regardless of the type of operation, when a NOTE: The defrost mode is not automatically selected.
temperature knob is set to the full clockwise or full It must be manually selected, when desired.
counterclockwise position, the system will deliver full
Defrost/Floor
hot or full cold air out of the ducts, respectively.
Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting and and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is
select the direction of the air by rotating the right mode also directed to the front door windows through the
knob to one of the following positions. When the Mode is side window demister grilles. Some airflow is delivered 4
set to any position other than AUTO, the automatic to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be
control of air temperature is disabled. The user must maintained.
adjust the temperature knobs to obtain the desired tem-
Floor
perature.
Air flows through the floor outlets located under
Defrost the instrument panel and into the rear seating area
Air is directed to the windshield through the through vents under the front seats. Some airflow is
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also delivered to defrost while in floor mode, so that comfort
directed to the front door windows through the side can be maintained.
window demister grilles. Some airflow is delivered to the
floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained.
Bi-Level outlets selected on the mode control dial. The button

Air flows both through the outlets located in the includes an LED that illuminates when manual operation
instrument panel and those located on the floor. Air is selected.
flows through the registers in the back of the center
NOTE: To manually control the air conditioning, the
console, and under the front seats to the rear seat
mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position.
passengers. These registers can be closed to block airflow.
The center console outlets deliver conditioned air while Recirculation
the floor outlets deliver heated air. This button can be used to block out smoke,
odors, dust, high humidity, or if rapid cooling
Panel
is desired. The “Recirculation” mode should
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
only be used temporarily. The button includes
ment panel. Air flows through the registers in the
an LED that illuminates, which indicates that the “Recir-
back of the center console to the rear seat passengers.
culation” mode is active. You may use this feature
These registers can be closed to block airflow.
separately.
Air Conditioning
NOTE: Extended use of recirculation may cause the
Press this button to turn the air conditioning on
windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to
and off during manual operation only. Condi-
fog, press the “Recirculate” button to return to outside
tioned outside air is then directed through the
air. Some temperature/humidity conditions will cause
captured interior air to condense on windows and ham- control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher
per visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on
“Recirculation” mode to be selected while in the defrost the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
or defrost/floor modes. Attempting to use Recirculation defrost mode.
while in these modes will cause the LED in the button to
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
blink and then turn off.
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
Operating Tips very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette 4
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Window Fogging
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool Summer Operation
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases, Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high
turning the air conditioning (pressing the snowflake quality antifreeze coolant, during the summer, to provide
button) on will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point
control, air direction, and blower speed to maintain of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50 %
comfort. concentration is recommended. Refer to Fluids, Lubri-
cants, and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the proper
As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to
coolant type.
direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature
When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy Winter Operation

traffic, in hot weather, especially when towing a trailer, When operating the system during the winter months,
additional engine cooling may be required. If this situa- make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
tion is encountered, operate the transmission in a lower windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other
gear to increase engine RPM, coolant flow and fan speed. obstructions.
When stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary to
Vacation Storage
shift into NEUTRAL and depress the accelerator slightly
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
for fast idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
speed.
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
automatic recirculation system. When the system senses system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com-
a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partial pressor damage when the system is started again.
Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort.
Operating Tips Chart
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 287
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 ▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual
▫ Extremely Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F Or
Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 5
⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 ▫ Five–Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 288
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 ▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 ▫ Rocking The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Normal Starting — Diesel Engines . . . . . . . . 282 䡵 Four-Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 285 ▫ Quadra-Trac I威 Operating
Instructions/Precautions — If Equipped . . . . 296
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Quadra-Trac II威 Operating 䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Instructions/Precautions — If Equipped . . . . 297
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
▫ Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ Quadra-Drive II威 System — If Equipped . . . . 301
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 312
䡵 On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . 312
䡵 Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ TCS (Traction Control System) . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ When To Use 4WD Low Range — If
▫ BAS (Brake Assist System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation) . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ ESP (Electronic Stability Program) . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . 303
▫ TSC (Trailer Sway Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ HSA (Hill Start Assist) (4WD Models With
▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
NV245 Two–Speed Transfer Case Only) . . . . . 320
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
▫ HDC (Hill Descent Control) (4WD Models ▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . 338
With NV245 Two–Speed Transfer
▫ Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 339
Case Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ ESP/BAS Warning Light And ESP/TCS
Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 330 䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 5
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 331 䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 344
䡵 Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 345
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 ▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 ▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 350
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 337 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 ▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

▫ 3.7 And 4.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 ▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 ▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 ▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . 363
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 357
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
䡵 Fuel Requirements (Diesel Engines) . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
䡵 Flexible Fuel (4.7L Engine Only) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 䡵 Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Towing – 2WD Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 ▫ Towing — Quadra-Trac I威 (Single-Speed
Transfer Case) 4WD Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
▫ Trailer And Trailer Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . 375
▫ Towing — Quadra–Trac II威 /Quadra–Drive
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 5
II威 4WD Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
STARTING PROCEDURE Normal Starting

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
Tip Start
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
belts. engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
number of reasons. A child or others could be starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
the ignition. A child could operate power win- fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle. 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
• Do not leave animals or children inside parked LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
vehicles in hot weather; interior heat buildup may normal starting procedure.
cause serious injury or death.
Extremely Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail- • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended. it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
If Engine Fails To Start fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
WARNING! converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into charged battery, booster cables may be used to
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery 5
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire in another vehicle. This type of start can be dan-
causing serious personal injury. gerous if done improperly. Refer to Section 6 for
proper jump-starting procedures and follow them
(Continued) carefully.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the

“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor • Low Oil Pressure Light is off.
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
Cold Weather Precautions
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F (0°C) may
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
require special considerations. The following chart sug-
repeat the normal starting procedure.
gests these options.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 sec-
onds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
*No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel (ULSD) should only
Normal Starting — Diesel Engines
be used where extended arctic conditions (-10°F/-23°C)
Observe the following when the engine is operating.
exist.
• All message center lights are off.
• Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.
NOTE: blankets will greatly increase starting capability at low

• Use of Climatized ULSD Diesel Fuel or Number 1 temperatures. Suitable battery blankets are available
ULSD Diesel Fuel results in a noticeable decrease in from your authorized MOPAR威 dealer.
fuel economy.
Engine Starting Procedure
• Climatized ULSD Diesel Fuel is a blend of Number 2
ULSD and Number 1 ULSD Diesel Fuels, which re- WARNING!
duces the temperature at which wax crystals form in
NEVER pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
fuel.
air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle.
NOTE: This engine requires the use of “Ultra Low This could result in a flash fire causing serious 5
Sulfur Diesel Fuel.” Use of incorrect fuel could result in personal injury.
exhaust system damage. Refer to “Fuel Requirements” in
this section for further details on fuel recommendations. 1. The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine.
Battery Blanket Usage
A battery loses 60% of its cranking power as the battery 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
temperature decreases to 0°F (-18°C). For the same de-
3. Watch for the “Wait To Start Light” in the instrument
crease in temperature, the engine requires twice as much
cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in Section 4 of this
power to crank at the same RPM. The use of battery
manual. It will glow for two to ten seconds or more,
depending on engine temperature. When the “Wait To Incomplete combustion allows carbon and varnish to
Start” goes out, the engine is ready to start. form on piston rings and injector nozzles. Also, the
unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting the oil
4. Tip Start Feature
and causing rapid wear to the engine.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key (FOBIK) to briefly turn the ignition switch to the Engine Warm-Up
START position and then release it. The starter motor will Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold.
continue to run, and it will automatically disengage When starting a cold engine, bring the engine up to
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the operating speed slowly to allow the oil pressure to
starter will disengage automatically in 20 seconds. The stabilize as the engine warms up.
starter can be disengaged by turning the ignition key to
NOTE: High-speed, no-load running of a cold engine
the OFF position, if required.
can result in excessive white smoke and poor engine
5. After the engine starts, allow it to idle for approxi- performance. No-load engine speeds should be kept
mately 30 seconds before driving. This allows oil to under 1,200 RPM during the warm-up period, especially
circulate and lubricate the turbocharger. in cold ambient temperature conditions.
Avoid prolonged idling in ambient temperatures below If temperatures are below 32°F (0°C), operate the engine
0°F (-18°C). Long periods of idling may be harmful to at moderate speeds for five minutes before full loads are
your engine because combustion chamber temperatures applied.
can drop so low that the fuel may not burn completely.
Engine Idling - In Cold Weather allow the lubricating oil and coolant to carry excess heat
Avoid prolonged idling in ambient temperatures below away from the combustion chamber, bearings, internal
0°F (-18°C). Long periods of idling may be harmful to components, and turbocharger. This is especially impor-
your engine because combustion chamber temperatures tant for turbocharged, charge air cooled engines.
can drop so low that the fuel may not burn completely.
Incomplete combustion allows carbon and varnish to ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
form on piston rings and injector nozzles. Also, the The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting the oil quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the heater cord to
and causing rapid wear to the engine. a ground-fault interrupter protected 110-115 Volt AC
electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension 5
Stopping The Engine cord.
Before turning off your turbo diesel engine, always allow
the engine to return to normal idle speed and run for Use the heater when temperatures below 0°F (-18°C) are
several seconds. This assures proper lubrication of the expected to last for several days.
turbocharger. This is particularly necessary after any The block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to
period of hard driving. have an adequate warming effect on the coolant.
Idle the engine a few minutes before routine shutdown. The engine block heater cord is located:
After full load operation, idle the engine three to five
minutes before shutting it down. This idle period will • 3.7L/4.7L Engine — coiled and strapped to the engine
oil dipstick tube.
• 5.7L Engine — bundled and fastened to the injector AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

harness.
CAUTION!
• 3.0L Diesel Engine — on the passenger side of the
vehicle, mounted on a stud between the fresh airbox Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
and coolant reservoir. ing precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
WARNING! a complete stop.
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving. • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
Damage to the 110-115 Volt AC electrical cord could vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
cause electrocution. is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Override

WARNING!
Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or override. The manual override may be used in the event
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle that the shift lever should fail to move from PARK with
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the key in the ON position and the brake pedal de-
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in pressed. To operate the shift lock manual override, per-
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit form the following steps:
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
1. Turn the key to the ON position without starting the
engine is idling normally and when your foot is
engine. 5
firmly on the brake pedal.
2. Firmly set the parking brake.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
3. Using a flat blade screwdriver, carefully remove the
This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out
shift lock manual override cover, which is located on the
of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
PRNDL bezel.
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ON position. Always depress the brake 4. Depress and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal first, before moving the shift lever out of PARK. pedal.
5. Using the screwdriver, reach into the manual override Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized
opening. Press and hold the shift lock lever down. dealer, if the shift lock manual override has been used.
Five–Speed Automatic Transmission
The electronically controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles/kilometers.
Gear Ranges
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold. If
Interlock Manual Override
there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle the
6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position. key to the LOCK position before restarting. Transmission
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL. gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the
engine if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first.
PARK
This gear position supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be started in • It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
this range. Never use PARK while the vehicle is in or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
vehicle in this range. Always apply the parking brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
first, then place the shift lever into the PARK position. or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle
and hit someone or something. Only shift into
WARNING! gear when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. 5
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply parking brake REVERSE
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move- Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a
ment and possible injury or damage. complete stop.
(Continued) NEUTRAL
Shift into NEUTRAL when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine
may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you
must leave the vehicle.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any shifts the transmission into ERS 3 (third gear), the trans-
other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result mission will never shift above third gear, but can shift
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational down to 2 (second) or 1 (first), when needed.
Towing” in Section 5 and “Towing a Disabled Vehicle” in
NOTE:
• If you pull and hold (not tap) the shift lever to the left
DRIVE (-), the transmission will downshift to the lowest gear
Shift into DRIVE only when the vehicle is at a complete that can be attained without overrevving the engine.
stop and the brakes are firmly applied. The transmission The display will show the gear the vehicle is in and
automatically upshifts through fifth gear. The DRIVE will limit the top gear to the one displayed.
position provides optimum driving characteristics under
• If you pull and hold (not tap) the shift lever to the right
all normal operating conditions.
(+), the transmission will exit the gear limiting mode
Electronic Range Select (ERS)Operation and shift to the appropriate gear. The display will read
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows ⬙D⬙.
you to move the shift lever left (-) or right (+) when the
3.7L and 3.0L Diesel Engine
shift lever is in the DRIVE position, allowing you to limit
When in the DRIVE position, the first tap to the left (-),
the highest available gear. For example, if the driver
will shift down one gear and will display that gear. For
example, if you are in DRIVE and are in 5th gear, when
you tap the shift lever one time to the left (-), the
transmission will downshift to 4th gear and the display gear). When in the DRIVE position in 5th gear, the first
will show 4. Another tap to the left (-) will shift the tap to the left (-) will downshift the transmission and
transmission into 3rd gear. display 5 (ERS 5 is the same as normal 4th gear). Another
tap to the left (-) will shift the transmission down to ERS
4.7L and 5.7L Engine
4 (direct gear).
On vehicles equipped with 4.7L or 5.7L engines, use of
ERS (or TOW/HAUL mode) also enables an additional
WARNING!
underdrive gear which is not normally used during
through-gear accelerations. This additional gear im- Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
proves vehicle performance and cooling capability when slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their 5
towing a trailer on certain grades. ERS 1,2, and 3 are grip and the vehicle could skid.
underdrive gears; ERS 4 is direct drive. ERS 5 (Overdrive)
is the same as the normal 4th gear. When in the DRIVE Screen Display 1 2 3 4 5* D
position in 1st through 4th gear, the first tap to the left (-),
Actual Gear(s) 1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-5
will display the ERS designation for the current gear (the Allowed
transmission will not downshift). For example, if you are
in DRIVE and are in 3rd (direct) gear, when you tap the * Applies to vehicles equipped with 4.7L/5.7L engines
shift lever one time to the left (-), the display will show 4 only.
(ERS 4 is direct gear). Another tap to the left (-) will shift NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
the transmission down to ERS 3 (the added underdrive deceleration (engine braking), move the shift lever to the
left “D(-)” and hold it there. The transmission will shift to • transmission has reached normal operating
the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed temperature.
down.
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem-
Overdrive Operation peratures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive
The automatic transmission includes an electronically and will automatically select the most desirable gear for
controlled Overdrive (5th gear for 3.7L and 3.0L diesel operation at this temperature. Normal operation will
engine, 4th and 5th gears for 4.7L and 5.7L engines). The resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
transmission will automatically shift to Overdrive, if the risen to a suitable level. Refer also to the Note under
following conditions are present: torque converter clutch, later in this section.
• the transmission selector is in DRIVE; During cold temperature operation you may notice de-
layed upshifts, depending on engine and transmission
• the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem-
temperature. This feature improves the warmup time of
perature;
the engine and transmission.
• vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
(48 km/h);
transmission will automatically select the most desirable
• the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated; gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission
temperature becomes hot enough, the “TRANSMISSION
OVER TEMP” message may display, and the transmis- overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When
sion may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmis- operating in TOW/HAUL mode, the transmission will
sion cools down. After cool down, the transmission will shift into direct gear and Overdrive will be enabled
resume normal operation. under steady cruise conditions.
In high ambient temperatures with sustained high engine
speed and load, an upshift, followed shortly thereafter by
a downshift, may occur. The TOW/HAUL light will turn
off. This is a normal part of the overheat protection
strategy when operating in the TOW/HAUL mode. 5
The transmission will downshift from Overdrive, to the
most desirable gear, if the accelerator pedal is fully
depressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph
(56 km/h).
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode — If Equipped
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
TOW/HAUL Switch
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, press the TOW/HAUL switch. This will improve The “TOW/HAUL” indicator light will illuminate in the
performance and reduce the potential for transmission instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been
activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds, then restart the en-
normal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is desired, gine.
the switch must be pressed each time the engine is
5. Move the shift lever to the desired gear range.
started.
If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
Transmission Limp Home Mode
return to normal operation. If the problem persists,
Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condi-
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to oper-
tions. If a condition is detected that could result in
ate. Only 2nd gear (3.7L and 3.0L diesel engine) or 3rd
transmission damage, the transmission limp home mode
gear (4.7L and 5.7L engines) will be available in the
will be engaged. In this mode, the transmission will
DRIVE position. Have the transmission checked at your
remain in the current gear (3.7L and 3.0L diesel engine) or
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
in direct gear (4.7L and 5.7L engines) until the vehicle is
brought to a stop. Torque Converter Clutch
A feature, designed to improve fuel economy, has been
To reset the transmission, use the following procedure:
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
1. Stop the vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally, at a calibrated speed, at light throttle. It engages at
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK position.
higher speeds under heavier acceleration. This may re-
3. Turn the engine off, and be sure to turn the key to the sult in a slightly different feeling or response during
LOCK position. normal operation in high gear. When the vehicle speed
drops below a calibrated speed, or during acceleration, • If the vehicle has not been driven in several days, the
the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages. The first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans-
feature is operational in Overdrive and in DRIVE. mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
NOTE:
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
• The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
cause damage to the transmission. The torque con-
transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usu-
verter will refill within five seconds of shifting from
ally after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of driving].
PARK into any other gear position.
Because the engine speed is higher when the torque
converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the Rocking The Vehicle 5
transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
This is normal. Manually shifting (using the ERS shift often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the shift lever
control) between 4 (direct gear) and 5/D (Overdrive between DRIVE and REVERSE, while applying slight
gear) positions will demonstrate that the transmission pressure to the accelerator.
is able to shift into and out of Overdrive. For vehicles
NOTE: The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) and
with 4.7L or 5.7L engines (which have two Overdrive
Traction Control (if equipped) should be turned OFF
gears), the transmission may not shift into the top
before attempting to rock the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic
Overdrive gear (normal 5th gear) until the transmis-
Brake Control System” in Section 3 of this manual.
sion fluid and engine coolant are warm.
The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main- FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
tain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or
Quadra-Trac I姞 Operating
racing the engine, is most effective. Racing the engine or
Instructions/Precautions — If Equipped
spinning the wheels, due to the frustration of not freeing
The Quadra-Trac I威 is a single-speed (HI range only)
the vehicle, may lead to transmission overheating and
transfer case, which provides convenient full-time four–
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in
wheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake
NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five
Traction Control System (BTC), which combines standard
rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating
ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance to any
and reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro-
wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer
longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
to wheels with traction.
CAUTION! NOTE: The Quadra-Trac I威 system is not appropriate
for conditions where 4WD LOW range is recommended.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between
Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in this section.
“First” and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
Quadra-Trac II姞 Operating Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends

Instructions/Precautions — If Equipped on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
The Quadra-Trac II威 transfer case is fully automatic in the wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
normal driving 4WD HI mode. The Quadra-Trac II威 cause damage to the transfer case.
transfer case provides three mode positions — 4WD HI,
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
NEUTRAL, and 4WD LOW.
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4WD HI mode. speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW
WARNING! 5
position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts
together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at You or others could be injured if you leave the
the same speed. The 4WD LOW position is intended for vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD (Neutral) position without first fully engaging the
LOW position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
increased tire wear and damage to driveline components. disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD HI
brake should always be applied when the driver is
position at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed
not in the vehicle.
the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Shift Positions Shifting Procedures

For additional information on the appropriate use of each 4WD HI to 4WD LOW
transfer case mode position, see the information below: With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h),
key ON or engine running, shift the transmission into
4WD HI
NEUTRAL, and raise the transfer case T-handle. The
All roads surfaces such as ice, snow, gravel, sand, and dry
“4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster,
hard pavement.
will begin to flash and remain on solid when the shift is
NEUTRAL complete. Release the T-handle.
Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a
powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind another
transfer case motor temperature protection condition
vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in Section 5 of
exists, a “CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURES” message will
this manual.
flash from the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
4WD LOW ter). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Low speed four-wheel drive. Locks the front and rear (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
driveshafts together. Forces the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Additional traction and maxi-
mum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
“4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster,

will flash and go out when the shift is complete. Release
the T-handle.
NOTE:
• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a transfer
case motor temperature protection condition exists, a
“CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURES” message will flash
from the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center).
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center 5
(EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
• Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the
Shifter T-Handle vehicle completely stopped, however difficulty may
4WD LOW to 4WD HI occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being prop-
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), erly aligned. Several attempts may be required for
key ON or engine running, shift the transmission into clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur.
NEUTRAL, and raise the transfer case T-handle. The The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to
3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster
than 3 mph (5 km/h), the transfer case will not allow
the shift.
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure

1. Key ON, engine off.
2. Vehicle stopped, with foot on brake.
3. Place transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. Hold down the NEUTRAL “pin” switch (with a pen,
etc.) for four seconds until the LED lamp by the switch
starts to blink indicating shift in progress. The lamp will
stop blinking (stay on solid) when the NEUTRAL shift is
complete. A “4WD SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will
display on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information
Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center Neutral Switch
(EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual. 5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to shift out of NEUTRAL.
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a
“CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURES” message will flash from
the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center). Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Quadra-Drive II姞 System — If Equipped ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS

The optional Quadra-Drive II威 System features three Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
torque transfer couplings. The couplings include ELSD narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
(Electronic Limited-Slip Differential) front and rear axles wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
and Quadra-Trac II威 transfer case. The optional ELSD characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
axles are fully automatic and require no driver input to ordinary cars.
operate. Under normal driving conditions, the units
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
function as standard axles, balancing torque evenly be-
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
tween left and right wheels. With a traction difference
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as 5
between left and right wheels, the coupling will sense a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
speed difference. As one wheel begins to spin faster than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto-
the other, torque will automatically transfer from the
rily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
wheel that has less traction, to the wheel that has traction.
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
While the transfer case and axle couplings differ in
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
design, their operation is similar. Follow the Quadra-Trac
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
II威 transfer case shifting information, preceding this
section, for shifting this system.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS

CAUTION!
NOTE: Prior to off-road driving, remove the front air
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
dam to prevent damage. The front air dam is attached to
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering
the lower front fascia with quarter turn fasteners, and can
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driv-
be removed by hand.
ing through water may cause damage that may not be
When To Use 4WD LOW Range — If Equipped covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
traction. This range should be limited to extreme situa- Driving through water more than a few inches/
tions such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
4WD LOW range. bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
Driving Through Water
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
to minimize wave effects.
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water.
Flowing Water transfer case) to assure the fluids have not been contami-
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm nated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance)
run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to pre-
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross vent component damage.
flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 in (23 cm). The
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
flowing water can erode the streambed causing your
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
that are downstream of your entry point to allow for
gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary.
drifting.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this section. 5
Standing Water Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in forward motion. Over-revving the engine can spin the
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wheels and traction will be lost.
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 in (51 cm) of water is
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, be-
less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
Maintenance control.
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
Hill Climbing
WARNING!
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW. Use tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back care-
first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills. fully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never
back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill always
and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine,
drive straight up or down.
and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill,
allowing the compression braking of the engine to help If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion
vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or by turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a
skidding the tires. fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually provide
traction to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill • Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.

Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
case into 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly exhaust system for damage.
down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
compression drag. This will permit you to control the
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
vehicle speed and direction.
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking values specified in the Service Manual.
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis- 5
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
sion whenever possible.
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
After Driving Off-Road propeller shafts.
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
similar dirty conditions, have brake rotors, wheels,
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
soon as possible.
your vehicle ready when you need it.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will

WARNING!
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
not have full braking power when you need it to parking maneuvers.
prevent an accident. If you have been operating your
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
and cleaned as necessary.
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
correct the situation. way damage the steering system.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
WARNING! WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering Do not use Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), or
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. other types of power steering fluids, when servicing
Service should be obtained as soon as possible. the power steering system of this vehicle. Damage to
the power steering system can result from the use of
the wrong power steering fluid.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering service interval is not required. The fluid should only be 5
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
occur. pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
Power Steering Fluid Check
The power steering system requires the use of
MOPAR威Hydraulic System Power Steering (P/N
05142893AA) or equivalent, which meets Chrysler Mate-
rial Standard MS-10838.
NOTE: The Brake Warning Light indicates only that the

WARNING!
parking brake is applied. It does not indicate the degree
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and of brake application.
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated

level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces.
PARKING BRAKE
To set the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition ON, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument Parking Brake
cluster will light. To release the parking brake, pull up Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked, and
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever the shift lever is in the PARK position. When parking on
completely. a hill, you should apply the parking brake before placing
the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the

transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving, failure to do so can lead to brake
WARNING! problems due to excessive heating of the rear
brakes.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the
or injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission curb on a downhill grade, and away from the curb on an
in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to uphill grade. 5
roll and cause damage or injury.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
• Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dan-
the driver is not in the vehicle.
gerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be injured. Children should be warned not ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
to touch the parking brake or the shift lever. Do The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the
not leave the key in the ignition. A child could driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
operate power windows, other controls, or move braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
the vehicle. computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent
(Continued)
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery The ABS pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph
surfaces. (20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
normal.
type, and tires must be properly inflated, to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
WARNING!
WARNING! • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Significant over or under-inflation of tires or mixing
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
of braking effectiveness.
to slow down or stop.
The ABS conducts a low-speed self-test at about 12 mph • The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
(20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the brake ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
while this test is occurring, you may feel slight pedal braking or steering efficiency beyond that af-
movement. The movement can be more apparent on ice forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
and snow. This is normal. tires or the traction afforded.
(Continued)
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing

sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including This is normal, indicating that the ABS is functioning.
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro- • Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in
can prevent accidents. unpredictable braking action, longer stopping dis-
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must tances, or brake damage.
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous • When descending mountains or hills, repeated brak-
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety ing can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. 5
or the safety of others. Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the
transmission or locking out overdrive whenever pos-
CAUTION! sible.
The ABS is subject to possible detrimental effects of • Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm-up,
electronic interference caused by improperly in- which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in
stalled aftermarket radios or telephones. loss of vehicle control. Be especially careful while
driving on slippery roads, in close-quarter maneuver-
ing, parking, or stopping.
• Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially Also, your vehicle is equipped with TSC (Trailer Sway
when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can Control) and, if it has 4WD with the NV245 two-speed
build up between the tire tread and the road. This transfer case, HSA (Hill Start Assist) and HDC (Hill
hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction, braking Descent Control).
ability, and control.
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
• After going through deep water or a car wash, brakes
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
may become wet, resulting in decreased performance
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
and unpredictable braking action. Dry the brakes by
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
gentle, intermittent pedal action while driving at very
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
slow speeds.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in Section 5 of this
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM manual.
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes ABS (Anti-Lock Brake
System), TCS (Traction Control System), BAS (Brake
Assist System), ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation), and
ESP (Electronic Stability Program). All five of these
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to

WARNING!
a limited-slip differential and controls the wheel spin
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) cannot prevent the across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
road conditions. ABS cannot prevent accidents, in- torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro- either the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes. Refer to “ESP
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can (Electronic Stability Program)” in this section for more
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS- information. 5
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
BAS (Brake Assist System)
less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
user’s safety or the safety of others.
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
TCS (Traction Control System)
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak- ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation)
ing pressure during the stopping sequence (do not This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
is released, the BAS is deactivated. of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
WARNING! applies the brake of the appropriate wheel and may also
reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift
BAS (Brake Assist System) cannot prevent the natu-
will occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
evasive driving maneuvers.
it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent accidents, including ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci- conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or
dents. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle other vehicles.
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
NOTE: Anytime the ESP system is in the “Full Off” ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
mode, ERM is disabled. Refer to ESP (Electronic Stability
This system enhances directional control and stability of
Program) for a complete explanation of the available ESP
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP cor-
modes.
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
WARNING!
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi- gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance maintain the desired path.
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle 5
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
or other vehicles. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
the intended path, ESP applies the brake of the appropri-
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
understeer condition.
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar-
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others. • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than

WARNING!
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) cannot prevent the
The ESP/TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
cluster, starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
the ESP system becomes active. The ESP/TCS Indicator
road conditions. ESP cannot prevent accidents, in-
Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESP/TCS
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP-
prevailing road conditions.
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
The ESP system has three available operating modes in

4WD HIGH range, two available operating modes on
2WD vehicles, and one operating mode in 4WD LOW
range.
High Range (4WD Models) or 2WD Models conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would nor-
mally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESP on
On
again, momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch. This
This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD HIGH
will restore the normal “ESP On” mode of operation.
range and in 2WD vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is
started or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from
4WD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to 4WD HIGH
range, the ESP system will be in this “On” mode. This
mode should be used for most driving situations. ESP
should only be turned to “Partial Off” or “Full Off” mode 5
for specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP
OFF switch. When in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, the TCS portion
of ESP, except for the “limited slip” feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the ESP/TCS
Indicator Light will be illuminated. All other stability ESP OFF Switch
features of ESP function normally. This mode is intended
to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving In this mode, ESP and TCS, except for the “limited slip”
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or feature described in the TCS section, are turned off until
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off” the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At
mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch. Once the situation 40 mph (64 km/h), the system returns to “Partial Off”
requiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is mode, described above. When the vehicle speed drops
overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing below 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESP system shuts off. ESP
the ESP OFF switch. This may be done while the vehicle is deactivated at low vehicle speeds so that it will not
is in motion. interfere with off-road driving, but ESP function returns
to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph
Full Off (4WD Models Only)
(64 km/h). The ESP/TCS Indicator Light will always be
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
illuminated when ESP is off. To turn ESP on again,
when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu-
momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch. This will
verability due to trail conditions. This mode is entered by
restore the normal “ESP On” mode of operation.
depressing and holding the ESP OFF switch for five
seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is NOTE: The “ESP OFF” message will display, and the
running. After five seconds, the ESP/TCS Indicator Light audible chime will sound, when the shift lever is placed
will illuminate, and the “ESP OFF” message will appear in the PARK position from any other position, and then
in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” the message was previously cleared.
in Section 4 of this manual for more information.
(64 km/h), the normal ESP stability function returns but

WARNING!
TCS remains off. When the vehicle speed drops below
With the ESP switched off, the enhanced vehicle 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESP system shuts off. ESP is
stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable. In deactivated at low vehicle speeds in 4WD LOW range so
an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESP and ERM that it will not interfere with off-road driving but ESP
systems will not engage to assist in maintaining function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds
stability. The “Full Off” ESP mode is intended for above 40 mph (64 km/h). The ESP/TCS Indicator Light
off-road use only. will always be illuminated in 4WD LOW range when ESP
is off.
4WD Low Range 5
NOTE: The “ESP OFF” message will display, and the
Full Off audible chime will sound, when the shift lever is placed
This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD LOW in the PARK position from any other position, and then
range. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if
range, or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from the message was previously cleared
4WD HIGH range or NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW range, the
ESP system will be in this “Full Off” mode. In 4WD LOW
range, ESP and TCS, except for the “limited slip” feature
described in the TCS section, are turned off until the
vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At 40 mph
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer

WARNING!
to “Trailer Towing” in Section 5 of this manual. When
With the ESP switched off, the enhanced vehicle TSC is functioning, the ESP/TCS Indicator Light will
stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable. In flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may
an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESP and ERM feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to
systems will not engage to assist in maintaining attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled
stability. The “Full Off” mode is intended for off- when the ESP system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full Off”
road use only. modes.
TSC (Trailer Sway Control) WARNING!

TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro-
priate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
HSA (Hill Start Assist) (4WD Models With NV245
will become active automatically once an excessively
Two–Speed Transfer Case Only)
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is re-
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
quired. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
during this short period of time, the system will release activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to WARNING!
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
the intended direction of travel.
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
HSA Activation Criteria when the system will not activate and slight rolling
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to may occur. This could cause a collision with another 5
activate: vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 8% grade or greater hill. Towing with HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
when pulling a trailer.
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• If you use a trailer brake controller with your • HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and on a hill without putting the transmission in
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the PARK and using the parking brake, it will roll
brake pedal is released there may not be enough down the hill and could cause a collision with
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a another vehicle or object. Always remember to use
hill and this could cause a collision with another the parking brake while parking on a hill, and that
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas- HSA Off
ing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
is responsible for braking the vehicle. using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Elec-
(Continued) tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of
this manual.
HDC (Hill Descent Control) (4WD Models With

NV245 Two–Speed Transfer Case Only)
HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills
during off-road driving situations and is available in
4WD LOW range only. To enable HDC (transfer case
must be in 4WD LOW range), press the HDC switch. If
the HDC switch is pressed when the vehicle is not in
4WD LOW range, the light in the switch will flash for five
seconds and HDC will not be enabled.
5
Hill Descent Switch

When HDC is properly enabled, the message “HILL
DESCENT CONTROL” will appear in the EVIC and the
light in the switch will be illuminated. HDC will auto-
matically apply the brakes to control downhill speed
when necessary. HDC has the capability to sense terrain
and will only activate when the vehicle is descending a HDC also has the capability to sense rough terrain, and
hill. It will usually not activate on level ground. will automatically adjust to a slightly slower set speed
(about 0.3 mph (0.5 km/h) than normal.
The HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the
driving conditions. The speed corresponds to the trans- HDC operation can be overridden with brake application
mission gear selected. to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed.
Conversely, if more speed is desired during HDC control,
• 1st = 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed in the
• 2nd = 2.5 mph (4 km/h) usual manner. When either the brake or the accelerator is
released, HDC will control the vehicle back to the origi-
• 3rd = 4 mph (6 km/h)
nal set speed.
• 4th = 5.5 mph (9 km/h)
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving only.
• 5th = 7.5 mph (12 km/h) At vehicle speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h), HDC will no
longer function. When the vehicle speed drops below
• REVERSE = 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
30 mph (48 km/h), HDC function will automatically
• NEUTRAL = 2.5 mph (4 km/h) resume and the vehicle speed will return to the chosen set
speed.
• PARK = HDC will not function
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been

WARNING!
driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control- (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
ling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
must remain attentive to the driving conditions and
NOTE:
is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
• ⬙The ESP/TCS Indicator Light and the ESP/BAS
Warning Light come on momentarily each time the
ESP/BAS Warning Light And ESP/TCS Indicator
ignition switch is turned ON.
Light
The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System 5
combined with the BAS indicator. The ESP/ will be ON even if it was previously turned off.
BAS Warning Light and the ESP/TCS Indicator
• The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
Light in the instrument cluster both come on
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
They should both go out with the engine running.
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
If the ESP/BAS Warning Light comes on con-
tinuously with the engine running, a malfunc-
tion has been detected in either the ESP or the
BAS system, or both. If this light remains on
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE:

• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
Tire Markings
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan- 4 — Maximum Load
dards Code (TIN) ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
spares designed for temporary emergency use only. standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T” into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards 5
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire 5
Tire Identification Number (TIN) Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the side of the tire.
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure This placard tells you important information about
Tire Placard Location the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed 2) total weight your vehicle can carry
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
Tire and Loading Information Placard 4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed 5
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
Tire and Loading Information Placard
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed [295 kg]).
the weight referenced here.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
calculated in step 4.
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
manual to determine how this reduces the available
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: • For the following example, the combined weight of

• The following table shows examples on how to calcu- occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities (392 kg).
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
5
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
cause accidents.
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
overload them.
in tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause 5
Tire Pressure damage that result in tire failure.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
areas are affected by improper tire pressure: • Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish

response or over responsiveness in the steering.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict-
or left. able steering response.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom- Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
mended cold tire inflation pressure. vehicle to drift left or right.
Economy Tire Inflation Pressures

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal driver’s side “B” Pillar.
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for The pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as
earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage, at least
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption. once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per

CAUTION!
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al- when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This the winter.
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
valve stem, which could damage it.
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure is
outside temperature condition. 5
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
(1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire inflation during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres- build-up, or your tire pressure will be too low.
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
temperature changes. tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- Radial-Ply Tires

tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading WARNING!
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
WARNING! on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
High speed driving with your vehicle at or above ways use radial tires in sets of four. Never combine
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on them with other types of tires.
your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
75 mph (120 km/h). authorized dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING! CAUTION!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only. Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
(80 km/h). Temporary use spare tires have limited compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear result.
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. use on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited- 5
use spare tire warning label located on the limited-use
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a spare tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare. vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
on the vehicle at any given time.
vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING! WARNING!
The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
than 50 mph (80 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck, and do not let
limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity speed.
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control. Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
Tire Spinning to help you in determining when your tires should be
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not replaced.
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this

point.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon various
factors including but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven 5
WARNING!
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth You could lose control and have an accident resulting
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the indicators appear in in serious injury or death.
two or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be re-
placed.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little

WARNING!
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline. • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
Replacement Tires
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
sion components. You could lose control and have
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
Information” placard for the size designation of your
approved for your vehicle.
tires. The service description and load identification will
be found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the capacity than what was originally equipped on
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index
that you contact your original equipment or an autho- could result in tire overloading and failure. You
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire could lose control and have an accident.
specifications or capability. (Continued)
• Do not install tire chains or traction devices on ve-

hicles with larger than P235/65R17 tires. Tires larger
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having than this may not provide sufficient body clearance
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire with chains or other traction devices.
failure and loss of vehicle control.
• Use SAE class “S” tire chains or traction devices only.
CAUTION! • Follow tire chain manufacturer’s instructions for

mounting chains.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read- • Install chains snugly and tighten after 0.5 mile (1 km) 5
ings. of driving.
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h), unless otherwise
TIRE CHAINS specified by the chain manufacturer.
Certain models have sufficient tire-to-body clearance to
• Drive cautiously, avoiding large bumps, potholes and
allow use of tire chains. Install chains on rear tires only.
extreme driving maneuvers.
Follow these recommendations to guard against damage
and excessive tire and chain wear:
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
different loads and perform different steering, handling, aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns. tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram. Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving. Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” in
Section 8 of this manual. More frequent rotation is
permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle threshold for any reason, including low temperature
recommended cold tire pressure. effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (–11°C). This means that when pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to 5
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1 km) after a Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off. The
three-hour period. Refer to the “Tires – General Infor- system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure
mation” in this section for information on how to Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the up-
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will dated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres- (24 km/h) to receive this information.
sure.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold

CAUTION!
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 33 psi
(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and • The TPMS has been optimized for the original
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a tempera- equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
ture drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to been established for the tire size equipped on your
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure damage may result when using replacement
Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam-
but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still age. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance
be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as
Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been damage to the sensors may result.
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
value. always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
NOTE: • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire the tire.
failure or condition.
Base System
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
while adjusting your tire pressure. technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
readings to the Receiver Module. 5
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
stopping ability. check the tire pressure in all of your tires, and to maintain
the proper pressure.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain The TPMS consists of the following components:
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
• Receiver Module
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
Light.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
wheel, if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full-size receive this information.
spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
tires. A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate, a warning mes-
system fault is detected. In addition, a “CHECK TPM
sage to appear, or the chime to sound.
SYSTEM” message will be displayed for 75 seconds when
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will a system fault is detected, and a chime will sound. If the
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “TIRE LOW ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, provid-
PRESSURE” message will display in the instru- ing the system fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Moni-
ment cluster for 60 seconds, and an audible chime will be toring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition
activated, when one or more of the four active road tire no longer exists. A system fault can occur by any of the
pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as following:
soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
recommended cold placard pressure value. The system
sensors.
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light will extinguish, once the updated tire 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light as long as none
housings. of the road tires are below the low pressure warning
threshold.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not
NOTE: have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure.
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure If you install the spare tire, in place of a road tire, that
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, 5
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In the event that upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound, a
the matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low “TIRE LOW PRESSURE” message will be displayed in
pressure road tire, the next ignition key cycle will still the instrument cluster for 60 seconds, and the Tire
show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON. After
ON, a “TIRE LOW PRESSURE” message will be driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
displayed in the instrument cluster for 60 seconds, and (25 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
a chime to sound. Driving the vehicle for up to will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn OFF the solid. In addition, a “CHECK TPM SYSTEM” message
will be displayed for 75 seconds. For each subsequent
ignition key cycle, a chime will sound, a “CHECK
TPM SYSTEM” message will be displayed for 75 sec- NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
onds, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on the proper pressure.
solid. Once you repair or replace the original road tire,
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire,
following components:
the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as • Receiver Module
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes • Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to wheel wells)
receive this information.
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
Premium System — If Equipped which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare
readings to the Receiver Module. wheel, if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full-size
spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road

tires. A low spare tire will set the “SPARE LOW PRES-
SURE” message, but it will not cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to
sound.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an au-
dible chime will be activated, when one or more of 5
the four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
EVIC will display one or more Low Pressure messages
(Left Front, Left Rear, Right Front, Right Rear) for three
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
seconds, and a graphic display of the pressure value(s)
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
with the low tire(s) “flashing.” Refer to “Electronic Ve-
and inflate the low tire(s) that is “flashing” on the graphic
hicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure.
manual.
The system will automatically update, the graphic dis-
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units play of the pressure value(s) will stop “flashing,” and the
in PSI, kPa, or BAR. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish
once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The

vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
CHECK TPM SYSTEM Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “CHECK TPM SYS-
TEM” message for three seconds. This message is then
followed by a graphic display, with “- -“ in place of the
pressure value(s), indicating which Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor(s) is not being received.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, The EVIC will also display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault message for three seconds when a system fault is de-
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale tected possibly related to the trigger component. In this
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ case, the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is then fol-
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be lowed by a graphic display, with pressure values still
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by shown. This indicates the pressure values are still being
any of the following: received from the TPM Sensors. However, the system still
needs to be serviced as long as the ⬙CHECK TPM
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
SYSTEM⬙ message exists.
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM 5
sensors. NOTE:
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure
that affects radio wave signals.
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In the event that
housings. the matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low
pressure road tire, the next ignition key cycle will still
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. ON, a chime to sound, a Low Pressure message to
appear in the EVIC, and the graphic display will still
show the low tire pressure value “flashing.” Driving the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash
the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
(24 km/h) will turn OFF the Tire Pressure Monitoring addition, the EVIC will display a “CHECK TPM
Telltale Light as long as none of road tires are below SYSTEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display
the low pressure warning threshold. The EVIC will dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. For each
also display a “SPARE LOW PRESSURE” message, subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound, the
and the graphic display will show a tire pressure value Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
in place of the “flashing” low tire pressure value. and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and
the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching
message for three seconds and then display dashes (- -)
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not
in place of the pressure value. Once you repair or
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire.
replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the
The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure.
vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will update
If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that
automatically.
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition key cycle, the Tire Pressure In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON, a chime will will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a
sound, and the EVIC will still display a “flashing” new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
pressure value in the graphic display. After driving the tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) FUEL REQUIREMENTS

in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
3.7 and 4.7L Engine
General Information All engines (except 5.7L engines) are de-
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and signed to meet all emissions regulations
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the and provide excellent fuel economy and
following conditions: performance when using high-quality un-
leaded “regular” gasoline having an oc-
tane rating of 87. The use of premium
• This device must accept any interference received, gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any 5
including interference that may cause undesired benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
operation.
5.7L Engine
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the The 5.7L engine is designed to meet all
following licenses: emissions regulations and provide satisfac-
tory fuel economy and performance when
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123 using high-quality unleaded gasoline hav-
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123 ing an octane range of 87 to 89. The manu-
facturer recommends the use of 89 octane
for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline Reformulated Gasoline

is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
over regular gasoline in these engines. burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates, and are spe-
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is prove air quality.
required.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro-
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid- fuel system components.
ering service for the vehicle.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Over 40 auto manufacturer’s worldwide have issued and Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World- genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel properties ates are required in some areas of the country during the
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom- Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci- your vehicle.
fications, if they are available.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on

CAUTION!
• poor engine performance
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol. Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability • poor cold start and cold drivability
problems and may damage critical fuel system com-
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
ponents.
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline E-85 perform the following:
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer) 5
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol. • change the engine oil and oil filter
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles • disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain- engine controller memory
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
exposure to E-85 fuel.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
MMT In Gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
• operate in a lean mode blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore,
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
Fuel System Cautions
life and reduces emission system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
CAUTION!
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer if the performance:
gasoline contains MMT.
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
It is even more important to look for gasoline without
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
and damage the emission control system.
higher than those allowed in the United States.
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu-
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
lated gasoline.
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
Materials Added To Fuel some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
products contain high concentrations of methanol. engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems stopped in an open area with the engine running for
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
the responsibility of the manufacturer. to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
against you. the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions 5
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
windows fully open.
WARNING! • Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
haust gases from entering the vehicle.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning.
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon

monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS (DIESEL ENGINES) Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier.
For most year-round service, No. 2 diesel fuel, meeting
NOTE: Federal law requires that you must fuel this
ASTM specification D-975 Grade S15, will provide good
vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15
performance. If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold
ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low
(below 20° F or -7° C), or is required to operate at
Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maxi-
colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged periods,
mum) to avoid damage to the emissions control system.
use climatized No. 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel
fuel with 50% No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide better
protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel
filters.
This vehicle is fully-compatible with biodiesel blends
up to 5% biodiesel, meeting ASTM specification D-975.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel-blending
agent. They can be unstable under certain conditions
and hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel
fuel.
Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel Label
Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water. To prevent for information on features that are common between
fuel system trouble, drain the accumulated water from Flexible Fuel and gasoline-only powered vehicles.
the fuel/water separator using the provided fuel/water
separator drain. If you buy good quality fuel and follow
the cold weather advice above, fuel conditioners should
not be required in your vehicle. If available in your area,
a high cetane “premium” diesel fuel may offer improved
cold-starting and warm-up performance.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (4.7L ENGINE ONLY) — IF 5

EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-
hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique,
yellow fuel filler cap (gas cap) that states Ethanol (E-85)/ E-85 Fuel Cap
Unleaded Gasoline, and by the FLEXFUEL badge that
will be located on the body of your vehicle. This section
only covers those subjects that are unique to these
vehicles. Please refer to the other sections of this manual
ETHANOL FUEL (E-85)

CAUTION!
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler cap (gas cap) 15% unleaded gasoline.
can operate on E-85.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
E-85 Badge
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternat- Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recom- (E-85) and Gasoline Vehicles
mended. Whether operating the vehicle on an E-85 ethanol fuel or
unleaded gasoline, the engine oil requirements are the
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
same. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of
• you do not add less than 5 gal (19 L) when refueling this manual for the proper quality and viscosity engine
oil.
• you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 mi (8 km) Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use 5
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
starting and/or significant deterioration in drivability
range of 0° to 32°F (-18° to 0°C), you may experience an
during warm up.
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
NOTE: Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM a deterioration in drivability (sags and/or hesitations)
D5798). With non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may until the engine is fully warmed up.
experience hard starting and rough idle following start
Cruising Range
up even if the above recommendations are followed,
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
especially when the ambient temperature is below 32°F
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
(0°C).
consumption. You can expect your MPG and your driv- ADDING FUEL
ing range to decrease by about 30% compared to gasoline
operation. CAUTION!
Replacement Parts DO NOT put gasoline in your diesel vehicle (if
All components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are equipped). If you accidentally put gasoline in your
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure vehicle, DO NOT start the engine. This will cause
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com- damage to the fuel system. Have the fuel system
patible parts. flushed.
CAUTION! Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on the
• Replacing fuel system components with non-
driver’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
ethanol compatible components can damage your
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle.
vehicle.
• Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in
your vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold start-
ing and may affect drivability.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impu-
rities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunction Indica-
tor Light (MIL) to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc- 5
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
Fuel Filler Cap off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the

fuel tank is full.
WARNING! WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
tank filled. could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is ground while filling.
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and will cause the malfunction indicator Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
light to turn on. If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap about one-quarter turn until “CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
you hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center). Refer to
properly tightened. “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4 of
this manual. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking”
If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the Malfunction
sound is heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler
Indicator Light will come on. Be sure the gas cap is
cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
System — OBDII” in Section 7 of this manual for more
information.
included on this label and indicates the month, day, and

CAUTION!
hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys- bottom of the label is your VIN.
tem could result from using an improper fuel tank
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
filler cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
impurities into the fuel system.
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, trailer
tongue weight, and cargo. The label also specifies maxi-
VEHICLE LOADING mum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR).
Certification Label Total load must be limited, so GVWR, and front and rear 5
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin- GAWR are not exceeded.
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label Payload
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar. The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
This label contains the month and year of manufacture, weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle’s GAWR is determined by the components in Curb Weight

the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
springs, tires, or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
components, sometimes specified by purchasers for in- capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
creased durability, does not necessarily increase the ve- loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
hicle’s GVWR. values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
Tire Size
added.
The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load Loading
capacity of this tire size. The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
Rim Size
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed. The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex-
Inflation Pressure
ceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
should then be determined separately to be sure that the
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
load is properly distributed over front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either
the front or rear axles has been exceeded, but the total TRAILER TOWING
load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be In this section you will find safety tips and information
shifted from front to rear, or rear to front, as appropriate on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is review this information to tow your load as efficiently
distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before and safely as possible.
driving.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
on the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the way hicles used for trailer towing. 5
the brakes operate.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
CAUTION!
you in understanding the following information.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and trailer tongue
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of
exceed the GVWR.
your vehicle.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

WARNING!
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem- It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a control of the vehicle and have an accident.
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale. Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10%
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider
and trailer when weighed in combination. (Note that
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
GCWR ratings include a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the
presence of a driver). Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
width of the front of a trailer.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles Weight-Carrying Hitch
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
rear GAWR. weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration/loading
hitches are the most popular on the market today and to comply with gross axle weight rating (GAWR)
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium- requirements.
sized trailers.
WARNING!
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch system works by applying • An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically system may reduce handling, stability, and brak-
used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight ing performance, and could result in an accident.
to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). • Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be 5
When used in accordance with the manufacturers’ direc- compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult
tions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
consistent steering and brake control, thereby enhancing reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for addi-
towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway tional information.
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and cross-
winds, and contributes positively to tow vehicle and
trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight-
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for
heavier trailer tongue weights (TW) and may be required
Trailer Hitch Classification Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
trailers weighing over 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) with the Standards
optional Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
dealer for package content.
Class II - Medium 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
The following chart provides the industry standard for Duty
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the Class IV - Extra 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Heavy Duty
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
given drivetrain. Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Model Model GCWR (Gross Com- Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Max. Trailer
bined Wt. Rating) Trailer Wt.) Tongue Wt. (See
Note)
3.7L 4x2 8,400 lbs (3 810 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) 350 lbs (159 kg)
4.7L 4x4 8,500 lbs (3 855 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) 350 lbs (159 kg) 5
4.7L (w/ 4x2 11,400 lbs (5 170 kg) 60 sq ft (5.57 sq m) 6,500 lbs (2 948 kg) 650 lbs (295 kg)
Trailer Tow
Group IV)
4.7L (Laredo/ 4x4 11,500 lbs (5 215 kg) 60 sq ft (5.57 sq m) 6,500 lbs (2 948 kg) 650 lbs (295 kg)
Limited)(w/
Trailer Tow
Group IV)
3.0L Diesel 4x2 12,200 lbs (5 534 kg) 64 sq ft (5.95 sq m) 7,400 lbs (3 357 kg) 740 lbs (336 kg)
(Limited)
(Overland)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as load and Gross Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and cargo (to the trailer) may be necessary to avoid exceeding
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of 3,200 lbs
and Loading Information placard. The addition of pas- (1 451 kg).
sengers and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue
Trailer And Trailer Tongue Weight

Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels, or heavier in the
rear, can cause the trailer to sway severely side-to-side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
5
Consider the following items when computing the

weight on the front/rear axles of the vehicle:
• The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the

trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed • During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
options, must be considered as part of the total load on towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
your vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
placard in the “Tire Safety Information” section of this Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants Schedule.” Refer to Section 8 of this manual for the
and cargo for your vehicle. proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR, or GCWR, ratings.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driv- WARNING!
etrain components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended. • Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
CAUTION! cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
(805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may dam- have an accident.
age your vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the transfer case

is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the
• Improper towing can lead to an injury accident. trailer wheels.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer tow-
ing as safe as possible: • GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over- vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a ratings are not exceeded:
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas- 1. GVWR 5
sis structure or tires. 2. GTW
• Safety chains must always be used between your 3. GAWR
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains 4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to
turning corners. always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight
as a percentage of total trailer weight).
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For
Towing Requirements — Tires Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes

− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact − Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
spare tire. vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
personal injury.
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” for proper tire inflation − An electronically-actuated trailer brake controller is
procedures. required when towing a trailer with electronically-
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
− Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
a hydraulic surge-actuated brake system, an electronic
pressures before trailer usage.
brake controller is not required.
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
1,000 lbs (454 kg), and required for trailers in excess of
Information” for proper inspection procedure.
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” for proper tire replacement procedures. Re-
placing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will
not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued)

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) • Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they distance. When towing, you should allow for ad-
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this ditional space between your vehicle and the ve-
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher hicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. in an accident.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring

WARNING! Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, 5
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake motoring safety.
system and cause it to fail. You might not have The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7–pin
brakes when you need them and could have an wiring harness. Use a factory-approved trailer harness
accident. and connector.
(Continued)
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle

but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
7-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
4-Pin Connector 3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
Towing Tips The transmission fluid and filter should be changed if

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy of continuous operation. Refer to the “Maintenance
traffic. Schedule” in Section 8 of this manual for proper mainte-
nance intervals.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How- NOTE: Check the transmission fluid level before towing
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the (4.7L and 5.7L engines).
TOW/HAUL mode (if equipped), or a lower gear range,
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
should be selected. 5
− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
NOTE: Using the TOW/HAUL mode (if equipped), or a
lower gear range while operating the vehicle under − When using the speed control, if you experience speed
heavy operating conditions, will improve performance drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shift- you can get back to cruising speed.
ing and heat buildup. This action will also provide better
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
engine braking.
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
WARNING!
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions: Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other
aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
− City Driving
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
airbag system and you could be injured.
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
− Highway Driving RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
Reduce speed. MOTORHOME, ETC.)
− Air Conditioning Towing – 2WD Models
Turn off temporarily.
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft
SNOW PLOW is removed. Towing with the rear wheels on the ground
Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The transmission damage.
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpect-
edly or could fail to deploy during a collision.
Towing — Quadra-Trac I姞 (Single-Speed Transfer Shifting Into NEUTRAL

Case) 4WD Models Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
Recreational towing is not allowed. This model does not
have a NEUTRAL position in the transfer case.
CAUTION!
Towing — Quadra–Trac II姞 /Quadra–Drive II姞 4WD
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
Models
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recre-
CAUTION! ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
5
Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used. Internal 1. Depress the brake pedal.
damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur
2. Turn the ignition key ON, engine off.
if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational
towing. 3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. Shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL.
NOTE: The transfer case must be in the NEUTRAL
position, and the transmission must be in the PARK
position for recreational towing.
Hold down the NEUTRAL “pin” switch (with a pen, etc.)

for four seconds until the LED lamp by the switch starts
to blink, indicating shift in progress. The lamp will stop
blinking (stay on solid) when the NEUTRAL shift is
complete. A “4WD SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will
display on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information
Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Neutral Switch
5. Start the engine.
6. Shift the transmission into DRIVE.
7. Release the brake pedal and ensure that there is no
vehicle movement.
8. Shut the engine off.
9. Shift the transmission into PARK. Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
10. Place the ignition key in the OFF position, and
normal usage.
remove key.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
11. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition key ON, engine off.
12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle with tow bar.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
13. Release the parking brake.
4. Shift the transfer case out of NEUTRAL.
CAUTION! 5
Transmission damage may occur if the transmission
is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEU-
TRAL and the engine running. With the transfer case
in NEUTRAL ensure that the engine is OFF prior to
shifting the transmission into PARK (refer to steps 7
and 8 above).
Hold down the NEUTRAL “pin” switch (with a pen, etc.)

for four seconds until the LED lamp by the switch starts
to blink, indicating shift in progress. The lamp will stop
blinking (go out) when shift is complete. The “4WD
SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will no longer be
displayed on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information
Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Neutral Switch
5. Shift the transmission into PARK.
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into DRIVE.
NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL,

CAUTION!
turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear
clash. Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position 5
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 ▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 䡵 Jump-Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 䡵 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . 400
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 6
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 ▫ 2–Wheel Drive Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 ▫ 4–Wheel Drive Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
390 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank just above the climate controls. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flashers. When the Hazard Warning flasher switch • On the highways — Slow down.
is activated, all directional turn signals will flash
• In city traffic — While stopped, put the transmission in
on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency.
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.
Press the switch a second time to turn off flashers.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
other motorists.
removes this heat. You can also turn the temperature
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor, and
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the the fan control to high. This allows the heater core to act
ignition key removed and the vehicle locked. as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
may run down your battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 391
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage WARNING!
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
• Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
chimes, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
center where it can be raised on a lift.
service.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to 6
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm, level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage

The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
in the passenger side compartment, behind the second means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
row seat. the spare, use the jack handle to rotate the “spare tire
drive” nut. The nut is located under a plastic cover at the
center-rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the liftgate
opening.
CAUTION!
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact type tools can damage the winch mechanism.
Jack Storage Location

CAUTION!
• The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
other power tools is not recommended and can
damage the winch.
• When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the end
of the cable and pull it through the center of the
wheel.
Preparations For Jacking

6
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire 1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery surfaces.
Spare Tire Removal
Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut. Use the
lug wrench to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the
spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to
allow you to pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle

WARNING!
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
Jacking Instructions
vehicle closest to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack WARNING!
or changing the wheel.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
2. Set the parking brake. help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
3. Place the shift lever into PARK.
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
4. Turn the ignition OFF. the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. the vehicle.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
6. Block both the front and rear of the be raised.
wheel diagonally opposite of the jack- • Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
ing position. For example, if changing transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
the right front tire, block the left rear REVERSE.
wheel.
(Continued)
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
Jack Warning Label
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and 1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from storage.
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. 2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is still
careful of motor traffic. on the ground.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are
6
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools as shown. Connect 4. Locate the jack as shown. For the front axle, place it
jack handle driver (1) to two extensions (2), then to the under the front lower control arm as shown. For the rear
lug wrench (3). axle, place it under the axle near the wheel to be changed.
Ensure the jack is closest to the inside of the wheel when
jacking on the rear axle. Do not raise the vehicle until
you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Assembling Jack Tools

1 — Jack Handle Driver
2 — Extensions
3 — Wrench
Front Jacking Location
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.

7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the 6
Rear Jacking Location vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface 8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter
and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. clockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. Correct
wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m). If in doubt Double check to ensure the tire is snug against the
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the winch cable
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service may result if the vehicle is driven with the tire loose.
station.
WARNING!
10. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
WARNING! Impact-type tools may damage the winch mecha-
nism.
A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
12. Reinstall the plastic plug into the floor of the cargo
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
area.
the places provided.
JUMP-STARTING
11. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in their proper loca- If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may
tions. be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the
NOTE: A tire should be stowed with the “beauty” side battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be
up. Storing the tire upside down may result in scratching dangerous if done improperly, so follow this procedure
or damage to the wheel face. Continue winching up the carefully.
tire until you hear the winch “ratchet” three times.
2. Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with-

WARNING!
out letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake on
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not both vehicles, place the transmission in PARK, and turn
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or cloth- the ignition OFF.
ing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching
3. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If
cal loads.
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush contami-
nated area immediately with large quantities of 4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
water. terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
• A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam- the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged
mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away battery.
from the vent holes.
6
• Do not use a booster battery or any other booster WARNING!
source that has a greater than 12-Volt system, i.e. Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
Do not use a 24-Volt power source. could establish a ground connection, and personal
injury could result.
1. Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets, which might make an unintended electrical
contact.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal

of the booster battery and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have • Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
a good contact on the engine. of immobilized vehicle.
• You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing
6. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster or towing.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the • Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above could cause the battery to explode.
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan. • During cold weather when temperatures are be-
low freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
WARNING! battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
Any procedure other than above could result in:
battery temperature must be brought up above
• Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out freezing point before attempting jump-start.
the battery vent.
• Personal injury or property damage due to battery
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
explosion.
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
(Continued) one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
of the vehicle.
2–Wheel Drive Models Only
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use Provided the transmission is operable, tow only in NEU-
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of TRAL at speeds not exceeding 30 mph (48 km/h), for
damage to the vehicle. distances of not more than 15 miles (24 km). Towing at
more than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 15 miles
CAUTION! (24 km), can cause severe transmission damage. If the
transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
15 miles (24 km), remove the driveshaft or tow with all
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
four wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to 6
tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or with one end of the
vehicle raised and the other end on a towing dolly.
WARNING!
4–Wheel Drive Models Only
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks. The manufacturer recommends towing with all four
Tow straps and chains may break, causing serious wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow
injury. the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle
raised and the other end on a towing dolly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment – 3.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
䡵 Engine Compartment – 4.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
䡵 Engine Compartment – 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
䡵 Engine Compartment – 3.0L Diesel . . . . . . . . . 409 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 410 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 7
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 410 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 ▫ Underhood Fuses

(Integrated Power Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID)
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
▫ Maintenance After Off-Road Driving . . . . . . 436
▫ Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
▫ Front Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup
▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
▫ Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) . . 455
Center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405
䡵 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 458 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
7
ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 3.7L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 — Battery

2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 — Power Distribution Center 8 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Integrated Power Module 10 — Air Cleaner Filter
7
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Battery
2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Power Distribution Center 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 — Air Cleaner Filter
6 — Integrated Power Module
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Integrated Power Module 11 — Air Cleaner Filter
6 — Battery
ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 3.0L DIESEL
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Integrated Power Module 9 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Battery
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors • Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indica-
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic tor Light” on could cause further damage to the
transmission control systems. When these systems are emission control system. It could also affect fuel
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent economy and drivability. The vehicle must be
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis- serviced before any emissions tests can be per-
sions well within current government regulations. formed.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system • If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-
also store diagnostic codes and other information to verter damage and power loss will soon occur.
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- Immediate service is required.
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
soon as possible. After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged. A “CHECK GASCAP” message
will be displayed in the EVIC (Refer to Section 4 of this
manual). Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly PROGRAMS
tightened. In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
The message will remain displayed until the vehicle
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
diagnostic system can retest the fuel system. The test will
perform the next time the vehicle is started, if the vehicle For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
was keyed off above 40°F (4°C) outside temperature and nance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction
the following vehicle start is above 40°F (4°C) outside Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
temperature. It may be possible to have a message that when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system
will not clear due to the test being disabled due to low is ready for testing.
outside temperatures. If the test is performed and the
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
problem is gone, the message will disappear.
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
If the problem persists, the message will appear the next serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace- 7
time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off. See
your authorized dealer for service.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test, the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must not proceed to the I/M station.
do the following:
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch. illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
or start the engine.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
this test over.
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you you may need to do nothing more than drive your
will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
check. system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen: Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
running. against you.
REPLACEMENT PARTS WARNING!

Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en- You can be badly injured working on or around a
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
warranty. service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person- MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 7
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are services determined by the engineers who designed your
available which include detailed service information for vehicle.
your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting
any procedure yourself. Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance. (0.95L) of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance. range.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected. CAUTION!
Engine Oil Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
Checking Oil Level
your engine.
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
3.0L Diesel Engine Only
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
Before checking the engine oil level, turn the engine off
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
and wait 15 minutes to allow for the oil to return to the oil
fully warmed engine is shut off, or before starting the
pan.
engine after it has sat overnight.
Change Engine Oil
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
proper maintenance intervals.
the oil level in the SAFE level range. Adding 1 U.S. Quart
3.0L Diesel Engine Only American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Anytime the oil is drained and filled it is very important Identification Symbol
to wait 15 minutes before starting the engine. This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Engine Oil Selection — Gasoline Engines
Petroleum Institute (API). The
For best performance and maximum protection for all
manufacturer only recommends
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
API Certified engine oils.
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer-
tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil Selection - Diesel Engines

For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the 7
manufacturer recommends engine oils that meet the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-11106, or
Mercedes Benz MB 229.31 or MB 229.51 and ACEA C3
qualified engine oils
Engine Oil Viscosity (3.7L/4.7L/5.7L Engines) Engine Oil Viscosity (3.0L Diesel Engine)
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature CAUTION!
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced technol-
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended ogy Diesel Engine and an emission device designed
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on to limit Diesel Particulate Emissions from being
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- released into the atmosphere. The durability of your
ment” in this section. engine and life expectancy of this diesel particulate
filter emission device is highly dependent on the use
Lubricants, which do not have both the engine oil certi-
of the correct engine oil.
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber, should not be used.
SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Low Ash engine oil is recom-
mended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil
improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel
economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on environment. Contact your local authorized dealer, ser-
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- vice station, or governmental agency for advice on how
ment” in this section. and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded
in your area.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils if the recommended oil Engine Oil Filter
quality requirements are met, and the recommended The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are at every oil change.
followed.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
Materials Added to Engine Oils The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad- able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its high-quality filters should be used to assure most effi- 7
performance may be impaired by supplemental cient service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are high-quality
additives. oil filters and are recommended.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, proper maintenance interval.
Maintenance-Free Battery
WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine tenance required.
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary WARNING!
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
near the engine compartment before starting the
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Do not lean
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
serious personal injury.
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air a booster battery or any other booster source with
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
recommended. clamps to touch each other.
(Continued)
Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner
• Battery posts, terminals and related accessories should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands at the start of each warm season. This service should
after handling. include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt condition should also be checked at this
CAUTION! time.
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the WARNING!

battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post, and the negative cable is attached to • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
the negative post. Battery posts are marked (+) approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
positive and (-) negative and identified on the tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
battery case. flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other 7
• If a “fast charger” is used while battery is in the unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. additional warranty information.
(Continued)
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected MOPAR威 Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy opera-
should be done by an experienced repairman. tion and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres- excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
sor Oil, and Refrigerants. attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling nents to insure proper function. When performing other
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro- underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Protection Agency (EPA) and is an ozone-saving product. The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
However, the manufacturer recommends that air condi- year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
tioning service be performed by authorized dealers or amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR威
other service facilities using recovery and recycling Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
equipment.
Windshield Wiper Blades The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the
mild nonabrasive cleaner to remove accumulations of salt fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
or road film. windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
from a dry windshield.
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
Avoid using the wiper blades to wipe frost or ice from the exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with rating information can be found on most washer fluid
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. containers.
7
Adding Washer Fluid
On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC), the low washer fluid level will be
indicated. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the
windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and
the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be displayed.
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the

WARNING!
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
Commercially available windshield washer solvents cation or oil change. Replace as required.
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around WARNING!
the washer solution.
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Exhaust System
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this
system.
manual.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex- converter as an emission control device.
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure against you.
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage. WARNING!
CAUTION! A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv- where your exhaust system can contact anything that
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor- can burn.
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning 7
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
resulting in possible damage to the converter and and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
vehicle. the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tuneup to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- Cooling System

age:
WARNING!
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
motion. coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
vehicle.
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough Engine Coolant Checks
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently Cooling System — Drain, Flush, And Refill
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty and contains a
face of the condenser. considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance interval.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for Selection Of Coolant
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool-
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti- ine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery 7
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Adding Coolant
CAUTION!
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze), other than the coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion to 5 Years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before replace-
protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (anti- ment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
freeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an period, it is important that you use the same engine
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible. Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional (antifreeze).
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
be compatible with the engine coolant (antifreeze)
and may plug the radiator. • The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
This vehicle has not been designed for use with Antifreeze/ Coolant 5–Year/100,000 Mile Formula
Propylene Glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology).
Use of Propylene Glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentra- decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34°F will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)
(-37°C) are anticipated. changes.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion- Cooling System Pressure Cap
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
engine cooling system. recovery tank.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main- The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac- accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated. 7
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-

WARNING!
mals and children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
• The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precau- to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a
tion. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when child, contact a physician immediately. Clean up any
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove ground spills immediately.
the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
Coolant Level
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
adequate. With the engine idling, and warm to normal
pressure.
operating temperature, the level of the engine coolant
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en- indicated on the bottle.
gine damage may result.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant no need to remove the radiator cap, unless checking for
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing en-
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is • Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
• Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
a month.
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
coolant bottle. Do not overfill. freezing.
Points To Remember • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- 50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) 7
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. your engine, which contains aluminum components.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is

WARNING!
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean. Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas
braking capacity in an emergency.
mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
system components should be periodically inspected. when performing under the hood service, or immedi-
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the ately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
proper maintenance interval. failure.
The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic
reservoir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a
“MAX” dot and a “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be
kept within these two dots. Do not add fluid above the
MAX mark, because leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly-closed
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check moisture.
should be conducted.
CAUTION!
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct fluid type. Do not allow a petroleum-base fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Seal damage may result.
WARNING!
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
• Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point, or is unidentified as to specification, Front Axle Fluid Level Check
may result in sudden brake failure during hard Lubricant should be to the bottom of the oil fill hole.
prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check 7
Lubricant should be 1/2 inch (1 cm) below the oil fill
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the hole.
brake fluid catching fire.
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level
specified above.
Selection of Lubricant Drain

Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recom-
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to
for correct fluid type. 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
Transfer Case
CAUTION!
Fluid Level Check
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks. If a fluid leak is
damage them and cause them to leak.
found, the transfer case fluid level can be checked by
removing the filler plug located on the back side of the
Selection of Lubricant
transfer case. The fluid level should be at the bottom edge
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
of the filler plug hole when the vehicle is in a level
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section
position.
for correct fluid type.
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
when the vehicle is in a level position.
Automatic Transmission
CAUTION!
Selection of Lubricant
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
mance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended trans-
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
mission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
manufacturer’s recommended fluid will result in
Parts” in this section for correct fluid type. It is important
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
that the transmission fluid be maintained at the pre-
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this sec-
scribed level using the recommended fluid.
tion for correct fluid type.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple- 7
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check (3.7L and 3.0L Diesel Engine)

Regular fluid level checks are not required. For this
reason, the dipstick is omitted. • The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does
not require adjustment under normal operating
If you notice fluid loss or shift lever malfunction, have conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs,
your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level. visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe
damage to the transmission may occur. Your au-
CAUTION! thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manu- fluid level accurately.
facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio-
ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque Fluid Level Check (4.7L and 5.7L Engine)
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
other than that recommended by the manufacturer operating temperature. This occurs after at least 15 miles
will result in more frequent fluid and filter (25 km) of driving. At normal operating temperature the
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu- fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips.
ine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type. To check the fluid level properly, the following procedure
(Continued) must be used:
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground. NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
pedal.
with the fluid at approximately 70°F (21°C) (room tem-
4. Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear position perature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
ending with the lever in PARK. room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the
seated.
normal operating temperature.
6. Remove the dipstick again, and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT” CAUTION!
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat-
Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F
ing temperature. The fluid level is only valid if there is a
solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick. If the
(10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add 7
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
fluid is low, add as required into the dipstick tube. Do
produce an accurate reading.
not overfill. After adding any quantity of oil through the
oil fill tube, wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to
7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.
fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the
fluid level.
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission Service Manual. Also check for accumulations of vegeta-
after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the tion or brush that could become a fire hazard, or conceal
dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated propeller shafts.
position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
dipstick tube. CAUTION!
Maintenance After Off-Road Driving Under frequent heavy-duty driving conditions,
After extended operation in mud, sand or water, or change all lubricants, and lubricate body compo-
similar dirty conditions, have your brake discs, brake nents, all driveline joints and steering linkage more
linings, and axle joints inspected and cleaned as soon as often than in normal service, to prevent excessive
possible. This will prevent any abrasive material from wear.
causing excessive wear or unpredictable braking action.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
After driving off-road, completely inspect the underbody
of your vehicle. Check the tires, body structure, steering, Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
suspension and exhaust system for damage. Check Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
chassis, drivetrain components, steering and suspension.
Retighten, if required, to torque values specified in the
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on Washing
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle.
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
The following maintenance recommendations will enable car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion clear water.
resistance built into your vehicle.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
What Causes Corrosion? lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of and Tar Remover to remove.
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• Use MOPAR威 Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
The most common causes are: stains, and to protect your paint finish. Take care never
to scratch the paint.
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing 7
• Stone and gravel impact.
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
• Insects, tree sap and tar. finish.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,

CAUTION!
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials considered the responsibility of the owner.
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
paint and decals. sibility of the owner.
Special Care • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., assure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month. • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and tailgate must be kept • Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint on scratches or chips as
clear and open. soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up
paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover, if absolutely necessary.
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use MOPAR威
chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
Leather Seat Care And Cleaning
heavy soil, use MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or select a
MOPAR威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
leather upholstery.
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only
MOPAR威 cleaners are recommended. Do not use oven Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
protective finish. and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
Interior Care
and MOPAR威 Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please 7
carpeting.
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean, then upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
Glass Surfaces
WARNING!
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
closed areas, they may cause respiratory harm. cleaner. Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows
equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use scrapers or
Cleaning Headlights other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
Plastic is not as scratch-resistant as glass and therefore directly on the mirror.
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol- must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
lowed by rinsing.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.

Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Dry with a soft tissue. Fuse Panel
7
Cav- Cartridge
FUSES Mini-Fuse Description
ity Fuse
Interior Fuses 1 30 Amp Audio Amp (B+)
The fuse panel is on the lower instrument panel just to Green
the left of the steering column. 2 15 Amp Sunroof (B+)
Blue
Cav- Cartridge Cav- Cartridge

Mini-Fuse Description Mini-Fuse Description
ity Fuse ity Fuse
3 10 Amp Htd Mirror (EBL) 10 10 Amp Final Drive Control
Red Red Module (FDCM),
4 20 Amp Rr Pwr Out (B+) Heater Ventilation/
Yellow Air Conditioning
5 10 Amp Rr HVAC (R/O) (HVAC), Rear Heated
Red (Commander Only) Seat Switch, O/H,
Heater Ventilation/
6 Spare (B+) Air Conditioning
7 20 Amp Door Locks (B+) (HVAC) Relay, Rear
Yellow Park Assist
8 Spare (B+) 11 Spare (B+)
9 20 Amp Pwr Outlet (B+) 12 10 Amp Door Mods, O/H
Yellow Red Lamps, IP Courtesy
Lamps, Glove Box
Lamp (B+)
13 10 Amp Autowipe (R/A)
Red

ity Fuse ity Fuse
14 20 Amp Cigar Ltr (R/A) 21 Spare
Yellow (Acc De-
15 10 Amp Tire Pressure Tran- lay)
Red sponders (R/O) 22 15 Amp Rear Wiper (B+)
16 10 Amp Upper & Lower Blue
Red Switch Bank, Diag. 24 10 Amp Power Distribution
Connector, Cluster Red Center (PDC) Relays,
(B+) Powertrain Control
17 15 Amp Flipper Glass (B+) Module, A580 (R/S)
Blue 25 10 Amp Shifter Assy (BTSI),
19 Spare Red Trans. Case Switch,
ESP/ABS, Trailer 7
(R/S)
20 10 Amp Steering Column Con- Sway Damp Relay
Red trol Module (SCCM),
Cluster (R/S), BUX
Trailer Tow
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center) Cav- Cartridge

Mini-Fuse Description
ity Fuse
2 40 Amp HID Headlamps
Green
3 50 Amp PTC Heater 2 (Diesel
Red Only)
4 30 Amp Power Outlets
Pink
5 50 Amp PTC Heater 3 (Diesel
Red Only)
6 30 Amp Cig Lighter, Trail Tow
Pink Batt
7 40 Amp Power Liftgate (Com-
Power Distribution Center
Green mander Only)
Cav- Cartridge 8 40 Amp Starter, JB Power
Mini-Fuse Description
ity Fuse Green
1 50 Amp PTC Heater 1 (Diesel 9 20 Amp Front Power Windows
Red Only) Blue

ity Fuse ity Fuse
10 — Spare 18 40 Amp Accessory Delay, Seats
11 40 Amp HVAC Blower Green
Green 19 40 Amp JB Power
12 30 Amp Rear Wiper, Ign R/O Green
Pink 20 30 Amp Wiper Motor
13 40 Amp Rear Window De- Pink
Green froster (EBL)/Heated 21 20 Amp Fuel Pump
Mirror Yellow
14 30 Amp Rear HVAC (If 22 20 Amp TCM, A/C Clutch
Pink Equipped) Yellow
15 — Spare 23 25 Amp Power Inverter 7
16 50 Amp ASD Natural
Red 24 20 Amp Rear Heated Seats
17 30 Amp ABS Pump Yellow
Pink 25 20 Amp Final Drive Control
Yellow Module (FDCM)

ity Fuse ity Fuse
26 15 Amp Brake Lamps 34 — Spare
Blue 35 20 Amp Trail-Tow Mod (Ex-
27 20 Amp HD Washer (If Yellow port Only)
Yellow Equipped) (Export 36 — Spare
Only) 37 20 Amp Ignition Switch
28 30 Amp ABS Valves Yellow
Green 38 20 Amp HID Left
29 20 Amp PCM Batt (Gasoline Yellow
Yellow Only) 39 20 Amp HID Right
30 — Spare Yellow
31 — Spare 40 25 Amp Next Generation Con-
32 15 Amp Powertrain Control Natural troller (NGC), Injec-
Blue Module (Diesel Only) tors
33 20 Amp Final Drive Control 41 20 Amp Subwoofer (SRT Only)
Yellow Module (FDCM) Yellow
E-Diff 42 — Spare

ity Fuse ity Fuse
43 25 Amp Coils, Actuators 8 10 Amp Lt Park Lamps
Natural Red
44 — Spare 9 10 Amp Trailer-Tow Park
Red Lamps
Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module)
10 10 Amp Rt Park Lamps
Red
12 20 Amp Front Control Module
Yellow (FCM) Batt #4
Yellow (FCM) Batt #2
14 20 Amp Adjustable Pedal 7
Yellow
15 20 Amp Ft Fog Lamps
Yellow
16 20 Amp Horn
Yellow
Integrated Power Module

ity Fuse ity Fuse
17 20 Amp Rear Fog Lamps (Ex- 28 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw
Yellow port Only) Yellow (IOD) #2
18 20 Amp Front Control Module 29 10 Amp Occupant Restraint
Yellow (FCM) Batt #1 Red Controller (ORC) R/S
19 20 Amp Lt Trailer-Tow Stop/ 30 10 Amp Occupant Restraint
Yellow Turn Red Controller (ORC) R/O
Yellow (FCM) Batt #3 VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 20 Amp Rt Trailer-Tow Stop/
Yellow Turn 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your
battery. You may:
22 30 Amp Final Drive Control
Pink Module (FDCM) • Remove fuse #27 in the Intelligent Power Module
MOD labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD#1).
23 50 Amp Radiator Fan
Red • Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
27 15 Amp Ignition Off Draw • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
Blue (IOD) #1 service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes Exterior Lights Bulb Type
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will Backup Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157K
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the Front Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
possibility of compressor damage when the system is Front Park/Turn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157A
started again. Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Headlights (Low Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006
REPLACEMENT BULBS Headlights (High Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Rear Turn/Stop/Tail Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157K
Interior Lights Bulb Type
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that
Glove Box Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
Grab Handle Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . VT4976 If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
Rear Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214–2 dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
Visor Vanity Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V26377 7
Underpanel Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) . . . . . . . 103
Telltale/Hazard Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis-

charge Headlights (HID), when the headlights are turned
High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID) — If
on, there is a blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and
Equipped
becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as
The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
the system charges.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlight switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb
yourself. If a headlight bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlights when the
headlight switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop-
erly. See your authorized dealer for service.
Headlight
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
1 — High Beam Bulb 3 — Turn Signal Bulb

2 — Low Beam Bulb 7
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the

bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Turn Signal

1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counter-
clockwise to remove from housing.
1 — High Beam Bulb 3 — Turn Signal Bulb
2 — Low Beam Bulb
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the

bulb.
CAUTION! CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol. bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Light

1. Reach behind the front fascia from under the vehicle.
2. Turn the front fog light bulb one–quarter turn coun-
terclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb. 7
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lights

1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two Torx fasteners.
1 — Tail/Stop Light Bulb 3 — Back-Up Light Bulb

2 — Tail/Turn Signal Bulb
4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.

3. Squeeze the socket assembly tabs to remove it from the
5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
housing.
light assembly.
Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) 2. Twist the bulb socket to remove from the CHMSL
housing.
1. Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket and reattach the
CHMSL.
7
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.7/4.7/5.7L Gasoline Engines 21 Gallons 79 Liters
3.0L Diesel Engine 22 Gallons 83 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
3.0 Liter Diesel Engine (SAE 5W-30 Synthetic, API Certified 10 Quarts 9.5 Liters
Low Ash)
Cooling System *
3.7 Liter and 4.7L Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 12.7 Quarts 11.8 Liters
5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) — Without Rear Heat
3.7 Liter and 4.7L Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 14 Quarts 13.2 Liters
5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) — With Rear Heat
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 5 15.2 Quarts 14.4 Liters
Year/100,000 Mile Formula) — Without Rear Heat
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 5 16.7 Quarts 15.8 Liters
Year/100,000 Mile Formula) — With Rear Heat
3.0 Liter Diesel Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 5 13.9 Quarts 13.2 Liters
Year/100,000 Mile Formula) — Without Rear Heat
3.0 Liter Diesel Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 5 15.3 Quarts 14.5 Liters
Year/100,000 Mile Formula) — With Rear Heat
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
7
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology)
Engine Oil (3.7L/4.7L/5.7L Engines) Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil (3.0L Diesel Engine) Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Low Ash Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-11106, Mercedes Benz MB
229.31 or 229.51, and ACEA C3 qualified engine oils.
Oil Filter (3.7L Engine) MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter (P/N 05184231AA) or equivalent
Oil Filter (4.7L and 5.7L Engine) MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter (P/N 04884899AB) or equivalent
Oil Filter (3.0L Diesel Engine) MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter (P/N 05175571AA) or equivalent
Spark Plugs (3.7L Engine) ZFR6F-11G (Gap 0.043 in [1.09 mm])
Spark Plugs (4.7L Engine) Upper Bank — FR8TE2 (Gap 0.040 in [1.02 mm]) Lower Bank — FR8T1332
(Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Spark Plugs (5.7L Engine) LZFR5C–11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.09 mm])

Fuel Selection (3.7L and 4.7L Engine) 87 Octane
Fuel Selection (5.7L Engine) 87 Octane Acceptable - 89 Octane Recommended
Fuel Selection (3.0L Diesel Engine) Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. The
manufacturer requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sul-
fur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use
of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid
damage to the emissions control system. For most year-round service, No.
2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide
good performance. If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below 20F or
-7C), or is required to operate at colder-than-normal conditions for pro-
longed periods, use climatized No. 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel
fuel with 50% No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide better protection from
fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters. This vehicle is fully compat- 7
ible with biodiesel blends up to 5% biodiesel meeting ASTM specification
D-975.
Chassis
Automatic Transmission MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
Transfer Case (NV140 Single Speed MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
Only)
Transfer Case (NV245 Two Speed MOPAR威 NV 247/245 Transfer Case Lubricant
Only)
Axle Differential (Front-Rear) MOPAR威 Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (API-GL5) or
equivalent with friction modifier additive.
Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR威 DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only rec-
ommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir This system requires the use of MOPAR威 Hydraulic System Power Steer-
ing Fluid (P/N 05142893AA) or equivalent, which meets Chrysler Material
Standard MS-10838.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES N
T
E
N
A
CONTENTS N
C
E
䡵 Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 462 ▫ Maintenance Schedule — Gasoline Engine . . 462
S
䡵 Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 ▫ Maintenance Schedule — Diesel Engine . . . . 476 C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 462 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
N
T The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
Maintenance Schedule — Gasoline Engine
E must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
N The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
A time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
N system. These and all other maintenance services in-
C cluded in this manual, should be done to provide best On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
E vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main- equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
S tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
C conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip indicating that an oil change is necessary.
H driving.
E Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
D Inspection and service should also be done anytime a indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
U
L malfunction is suspected. is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
E as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
S NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emis-
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be NOTE:
8 performed by any automotive repair establishment or • The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
individual using any automotive part that has been time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 463 M
A
if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even I
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu-
N
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi- racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
T
nated. level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark. E
N
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if A
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time. required. N
C
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals Once a Month E
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months, whichever
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or S
comes first. C
damage. H
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator E
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals D
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If this
as required. U
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other L
than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake E
referring to the steps described under ”Electronic Vehicle master cylinder, power steering and transmission S
Information Center” in Section 4 of this manual. (4.7L and 5.7L only) and add as needed. 8
At Each Stop for Fuel • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
A
I At Each Oil Change Required Maintenance Intervals
N
T • Change the engine oil filter. NOTE: ** Vehicles built with the 4.7L engine are
E
N equipped with sixteen spark plugs, one set is located on
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
A the top of the engine under the coils and the second set is
N located on the side of the engine.
C CAUTION!
E The spark plugs located under the coils are a standard
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
S plug and must be change every 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
C
may result in damage to the vehicle.
H The spark plugs located on the side of the engine are a
E premium plug and must be changed every 102,000 miles
D (170 000 km).
U
L
E
S
8
A
I
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or 12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service N
6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule T
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. E
Schedule N
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires.
A
filter. ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the N
❏ Rotate tires. engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. C
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. E
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months. S
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or C
12 months. H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

A
I
N 18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or 24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
T 18 Months Maintenance 24 Months Maintenance 30 Months Maintenance
E
N Service Schedule Service Schedule Service Schedule
A ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
N filter. filter. filter.
C ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Rotate tires.
E ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
change if using your vehicle for police, following: Dusty or off-road conditions. ❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs
S taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; (4.7L Engine).
C towing. replace if necessary. ❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and
H
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if 5.7L Engines).
E
D necessary. ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
U ❏ Inspect the CV joints. equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
L ❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
E ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
S and boot seals; replace if necessary.
8
Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
A
I
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or 48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or N
36 Months Maintenance 42 Months Maintenance 48 Months Maintenance T
E
Service Schedule Service Schedule Service Schedule N
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil A
filter. filter. filter. N
❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Rotate tires. C
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the E
following: Dusty or off-road conditions. following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; S
replace if necessary. replace if necessary. C
H
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
E
necessary. necessary. D
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, ❏ Inspect the CV joints. U
change if using your vehicle for police, ❏ Inspect exhaust system. L
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends E
towing. and boot seals; replace if necessary. S
8
A
I
N 54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or 60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
T 54 Months Maintenance Schedule
E ❏
N Service Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
A ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
N filter. ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
C ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
E ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, ❏ Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).
change if using your vehicle for police, ❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine).
S taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer ❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and 5.7L Engines).
C towing. ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
H ❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the
E following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
D
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
U
L fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
E ❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 102,000 miles (170 000 km).
S
8

A
I
66 Months Maintenance Schedule T
Service Schedule N
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires.
A
filter. ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the N
❏ Rotate tires. engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. C
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. E
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. S
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary. C
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, H
off-road or frequent trailer towing. E
D
U
L
E
S
8

A
I
N 78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or
T 78 Months Maintenance 84 Months Maintenance
E
N Service Schedule Service Schedule
A ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
N filter. filter.
C ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Rotate tires.
E ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
S Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
C replace if necessary.
H
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
E
D necessary.
U
L
E
S
8

A
I
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service 96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or N
Schedule 96 Months Maintenance T
❏ E
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Service Schedule N
❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil A
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. filter. N
❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine). ❏ Rotate tires. C
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and 5.7L Engines). ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the E
❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. † following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; S
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid. replace if necessary. C
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, H
off-road or frequent trailer towing. E
necessary. D
❏ Inspect the CV joints. U
❏ Inspect exhaust system. L
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends E
and boot seals; replace if necessary. S
8

A
I
E
E ❏ Replace the ignition cables (4.7L ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
Engine). following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
S ❏ Replace the side row of spark plugs Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
C (4.7L Engine). replace if necessary.
H
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
E
D not done at 60 months. necessary.
U ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
L change if using your vehicle for police,
E taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
S towing.
8
A
I
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule N
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. T
❏ Rotate tires. E
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. N
❏ Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine). A
N
❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine).
C
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and 5.7L Engines). E
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. S
❏ Inspect the CV joints. C
❏ Inspect exhaust system. H
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary. E
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s). D
❏ Change the transfer case fluid. U
L
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
E
S
8
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

A
I
E
E ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
change if using your vehicle for police, following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
S taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
C towing. replace if necessary.
H
E
D necessary.
U
L
E
S
8
A
I
Service Schedule N
❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil A
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the filter. N
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Rotate tires. C
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. E
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, ❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs
off-road or frequent trailer towing. (4.7L Engine). S
❏ Inspect the CV joints. ❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and C
5.7L Engines).
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary. E
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles D
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. U
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid. L
E
S
8

A
I † This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer Chrysler LLC recommends that these maintenance inter-
N
T to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions vals be performed at your selling dealer. The technicians
E warranty. at your dealership know your vehicle best, and have
N access to factory trained information, genuine MOPAR威
A
N WARNING! parts, and specially designed electronic and mechanical
C tools that can help prevent future costly repairs.
E You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which The maintenance intervals shown should be performed
S you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If as indicated in this section.
C
H you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
E service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
D tervals exceed 12,500 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months,
U
chanic.
whichever comes first.
L
E Maintenance Schedule — Diesel Engine At Each Stop for Fuel
S To help you have the best driving experience possible,
• Check the engine oil level about 15 minutes after a
8 the manufacturer has identified the specific vehicle main-
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
tenance service intervals that are required to keep your
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
vehicle operating properly and safely.
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
A
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if • Inspect for the presence of water in the fuel filter/ I
N
required. water separator unit. T
E
Once a Month N
CAUTION!
A
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or N
Failure to perform the required maintenance items C
damage.
may result in damage to the vehicle. E
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required. Required Maintenance Intervals S
C
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following H
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
pages for the required maintenance intervals. E
master cylinder, and power steering and add as D
needed. U
L
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct E
operation. S
At Each Oil Change

8
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
A
I
N 6,250 Miles (10,000 km) or 12,500 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
T 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N Schedule
❏ Rotate tires.
A ❏ Rotate tires.
N ❏ If you are using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
C the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
E ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,500 miles (20 000 km) or
S 12 months.
C ❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,500 miles (20 000 km) or
H 12 months.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8

A
I
18 Months Maintenance Schedule T
❏ E
Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Rotate tires.
A
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. N
Change if using your vehicle for police, ❏ Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit. C
taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary. E
towing. ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid. H
❏ Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. E
D
U
L
E
S
8

A
I
E
A ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires.
N filter.
C ❏ Rotate tires.
E ❏ If you are using your vehicle for any of
the following: Dusty or off-road
S conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner
C filter, replace if necessary.
H
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if
E
D necessary.
U ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid.
L Change if using your vehicle for police,
E taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer
S towing.
8
A
I
❏ E
❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Rotate tires. A
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. N
❏ Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit. Change if using your vehicle for police, C
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary. taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer E
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. towing.
D
U
L
E
S
8

A
I
N 62,500 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service 68,750 Miles (110,000 km) or
T Schedule 66 Months Maintenance
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N Service Schedule
A ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Rotate tires.
N ❏ If you are using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
C the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
E ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the
S following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
C ❏ Change the transfer case if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet,
H off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8

A
I
❏ E
❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Rotate tires. A
❏ Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit. C
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary. E
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. Change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, S
off-road, or frequent trailer towing. C
❏ Inspect the CV joints. E
D
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
U
❏ Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. L
E
S
8

A
I
N 87,500 Miles (140,000 km) or 93,750 Miles (150,000 km) or
T 84 Months Maintenance 90 Months Maintenance
E
N Service Schedule Service Schedule
A ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires.
N filter. ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid.
C ❏ Rotate tires. Change if using your vehicle for police,
E ❏ If you are using your vehicle for any of taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer
the following: Dusty or off-road towing.
S conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner
C filter, replace if necessary.
H
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if
E
D necessary.
U
L
E
S
8

A
I
100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service N
Schedule T
N
❏ Rotate tires.
A
❏ Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit. C
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary. E
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter. E
D
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant (antifreeze).
U
❏ Replace accessory drive belt(s). L
S
8
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

A
I
N WARNING!
T
E You can be badly injured working on or around a
N motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
A
N you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
C you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
E service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
S chanic.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 489 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . 492
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
▫ Chrysler LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . 490 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 490 9
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
488 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire ▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 489
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
YOUR VEHICLE At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know you and the vehicle best,
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident and are most concerned that you get prompt and high
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers
service advisor know. have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
Be Reasonable With Requests tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is 9
If you list a number of items and you must have your fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
This is why you should always talk to an authorized • Vehicle delivery date and mileage
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
Chrysler LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Phone: (800) 992-1997
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the P.O. Box 1621
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
center. Phone: (800) 465–2001
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen- In Mexico contact:
ter should include the following information: Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
• Owner’s name and address
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office) In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech have any questions about the service contract, call the
Impaired (TDD/TTY) manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hot-
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the line at 1-800-521-9922.
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Service Contract Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail 9
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their MOPAR姞 PARTS

sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
concerns. available from an authorized dealer. They will help keep
the vehicle operating at its best.
WARNING!
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
known to the State of California to cause cancer and If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi- cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi- Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer manufacturer.
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only) a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable individual problems between you, your authorized
to this vehicle. dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153), To order the following manuals, you may use either the
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis- website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. for an order form.
In Canada NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
• Service Manuals
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to: These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations information that students and professional technicians
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
3V9. maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler LLC
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the ve-
hicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, 9
and charts.
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Call toll free at:

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia- • 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve- Or
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, • www.techauthority.com
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment. DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
• Owner’s Manuals The following tire grading categories were established by
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
assistance of service and engineering specialists to specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles. in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
Included are starting, operating, emergency and main- your vehicle.
tenance procedures as well as specifications, capabili- All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
ties and safety tips. requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
WARNING!
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
conditions on a specified government test course. For straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
times as well on the government course as a tire graded peak traction characteristics.
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart Temperature Grades
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac- representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
teristics and climate. and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
Traction Grades
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor- 9
mance.
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-

sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
498 INDEX
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 309,312
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 417 Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 20
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 264
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56,71,186 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288,433
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,187 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
INDEX 499
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . 294 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . 290 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .. . . . . 163 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . 163 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 68
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449,450
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 25 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,70 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Caps, Filler
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,359
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309,312 Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 10
500 INDEX
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209,223,227,236
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,260 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Connector
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . 247
Check Engine Light Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,59,64,66 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,64 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
INDEX 501
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Dipsticks

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . 425,456 Disarming, Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Disposal
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Used Engine Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,263,269 Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) . . . . 257
Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Diesel Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 10
502 INDEX
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 163 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 411,462
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Engine
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406,407,408,409
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Compartment Identification . . . . . . 406,407,408,409
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 144 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,359
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . 192 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Electronic Vehicle Information Center Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355,456
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,193 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414,456
Emergency, In Case of Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415,456
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
INDEX 503
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,185,452,454
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 54 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361,362
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,359,422 Flipper Glass, Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,422 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Exterior Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Fluid Level Checks
Filters Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433,434
Air Cleaner . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Engine Oil . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Engine Oil Disposal .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Finish Care . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 458
Flashers . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 10
504 INDEX
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,192,453 Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Flexible Fuel Vehicles

Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358,365,367
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 364,366,410
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Front Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Gauges
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,26,110,355
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355,356 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Glow Plug Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367,370
INDEX 505
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367,369 Hitches

GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Hands-Free Phone (uconnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 154
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,450 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,15
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,59
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,120 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182,184
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 137 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 10
506 INDEX
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,64
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,137 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391,394 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,130
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56,71,186
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
INDEX 507
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,134

Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,137
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 185
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,137 Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 325 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . 192 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138,153
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,192,453 Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Glow Plug Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 185
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450,451 Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Tow/Haul Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 10
508 INDEX
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,130,136,452,454 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462,476
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 185,411
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,64 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
INDEX 509
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413,492 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415,456
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416,456
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 355,356 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410,411
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,191 Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . 302,436 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . 302,436 Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189,390
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 6,493
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 10
510 INDEX
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Pretensioners
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Programming Transmitters
Phone, Hands-Free (uconnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 331
Polishing and Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296,297
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Radio, Satellite (uconnect gps) . . . . . . . . . . . . 252,257
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 163 Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306,307 Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
INDEX 511
Rear Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 258
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . 383 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . 385 Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Remote Control Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 10
512 INDEX
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Satellite Radio (uconnect studios) . . . . . . . . . . 252,257 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,120
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462,476 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,70 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 41 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,66 Security Against Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,187
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Service Engine Soon Light
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
INDEX 513
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209,223,227,236 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281,285
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Shift Lock Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Steering
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306,307
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,136,185,452,454 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Sirius Backseat TV™ (uconnect studios) . . . . . . . . 257 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338,339,392 Storage, Behind the Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Specifications Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272,448
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,280 Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 10
514 INDEX
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 46 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,335,494
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 264 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 189 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Theft System Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Theft System Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 331 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
INDEX 515
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Tow/Haul Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369,401 Transmission
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288,433
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Transmitter Battery Service
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 154
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Transmitter Programming
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 10
516 INDEX
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 21 Video Entertainment System™

Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 (Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,185,452,454 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
uconnect (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444,447 Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 247 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139,421
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,162
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331,367 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272,448 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
INDEX 517
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,263,269 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone only fully shielded coaxial cable.
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
The positive power connection should be made directly
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
normal may require special precautions.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
This connection should not be fused. ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
2009 GRAND CHEROKEE
GRAND CHEROKEE 2009 owner’s manual
Chrysler LLC
81-326-0954 Second Edition Printed in U.S.A.
150920 GrCherokee.indd 1 9/9/08 8:33:17 AM

Manual Del Propietario Jeep Grand Cherokee 2009

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Manual Del Propietario Jeep Grand Cherokee 2009

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Del Propietario Jeep Grand Cherokee 2009

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2009 GRAND CHEROKEE

GRAND CHEROKEE 2009 owner’s manual

150920 GrCherokee.indd 1 9/9/08 8:33:17 AM

INTRODUCTION working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

▫ Express Down Window Feature — If ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 45 ▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

Integrated Ignition Key

NOTE: Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” under

NOTE: the vehicle. Once an RKE transmitter is programmed to a

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter

Three-Button RKE Transmitter

To Lock the Doors To Release the Liftgate Flipper Glass

Using the Panic Alarm Programming Additional Transmitters

If your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter fails to • Doors closed

NOTE: NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system

DOOR LOCKS Power Door Locks

passenger/rear passenger door windows. The window

Child Protection Door Lock

Resetting the Auto Up Feature

open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-

Liftgate Flipper Glass

Liftgate Glass Release

NOTE: The front airbags have a multistage inflator

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS WARNING!

This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

Latch Plate to Buckle (Continued)

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped

How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode

Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental

The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This

Window Airbag Location

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bol-

You should read the instructions provided with your

Airbag System Components • Front Acceleration Sensors

NOTE: The interior lights can only be deactivated if the

4. Otherwise required by law. • Transmission gear selection

For seat belts having an Automatic Locking Retractor

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 ▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 118

▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . 130 ▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 䡵 Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by

uconnect姞 phone — IF EQUIPPED NOTE:

• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to Dial by Saying a Number

• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or NOTE:

Towing Assistance Paging

Voice Commands Voice Commands

Voice Commands Voice Commands

General Information VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (VR) — IF

Commands In this mode, you can say the following commands: